TW475321B - Method and apparatus for a decentralized and wireless communications system - Google Patents

Method and apparatus for a decentralized and wireless communications system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW475321B
TW475321B TW89104116A TW89104116A TW475321B TW 475321 B TW475321 B TW 475321B TW 89104116 A TW89104116 A TW 89104116A TW 89104116 A TW89104116 A TW 89104116A TW 475321 B TW475321 B TW 475321B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
call
terminal
bit
data
connection
Prior art date
Application number
TW89104116A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Shun-Jen Houng
Hwey-Chen Chiang
Kuo-Pin Yang
Original Assignee
Microtek Int Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Microtek Int Inc filed Critical Microtek Int Inc
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW475321B publication Critical patent/TW475321B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A decentralized wireless communications network that establishes data links among groups of, rather than between pairs of wireless transceiver units through implementation of enabling signaling and protocols with conventional wireless communication hardware including a central processing unit, spread spectrum modem, TLF transceiver all included in a single handset, or base station.

Description

475321 五、發明說明α) [發明技術領域] 本發明係關於一種分散式無線通訊網路的方法與裝置 以及其主控系統,特別是關於利用無線網路傳輸具有聲音 及影像資訊等數位資料之安全及數^^訊之方法^ ,— --——-—— - ________— —'—— 、 [習知技術] 隨著數位通訊系統的普遍化,對於需要進行高速連結 聲音、影像及其它數位資料的要求正愈來愈多。在目前, 以有線傳輸為基礎的數位網路正提供一個符合上述要求的 最佳解決方法。由於此種數位有線網路具有寬頻載波能 --—----------— ——— —~ —*—-— 這足以 另一種傳統有線網路架構的就是無線通訊網路,例如 以無線電波(RF)為傳輸基礎的網路。無線式的資料傳輸是 利用在傳統有線連結的場所中,以無線電波或是紅外光波 '—*— —--- 1 " "— — 去進行使用者與裝置間的溝通聯絡。雖然無線系統允許使 —~^_______ 用者可以更多的彈性去減少利用電線來連結所欲之網路區 域,但是對於要達到前述之高速高資料量傳輸的要求上, 無線系統會出現遲滯現象。目前無線網路極適合在可忽略 广 ---------—--------_______________ 雜、不須安全保護的通訊上、及不須 即,但是這些並無法吸引取ϋΐ 統有:線的網路架構,因為有線網路得以安.全地根據需求轉 換多媒體資訊。因為這些理由,傳統的無線網路架構很少 被考慮用來替代有線網路。 -傳統無線網路的更大缺點是:可供使用的無線電頻475321 V. Description of the invention α) [Technical Field of the Invention] The present invention relates to a method and device for a decentralized wireless communication network and its main control system, and particularly to the security of transmitting digital data with audio and video information using a wireless network And the method of digital ^^ message ^, ----------------________- --'——, [knowledge technology] With the popularization of digital communication systems, the need for high-speed connection of audio, video and other digital Information requirements are increasing. Currently, digital networks based on wired transmission are providing the best solution to meet these requirements. Because this digital wired network has broadband carrier power --------------- -------~-* ----- this is sufficient for another traditional wired network architecture is the wireless communication network, For example, networks based on radio wave (RF) transmission. Wireless data transmission is used in the place of traditional wired connection, using radio waves or infrared light waves' — * — —--- 1 " " — — to communicate between the user and the device. Although the wireless system allows — ~ ^ _______ users to have more flexibility to reduce the use of electrical wires to connect to the desired network area, the wireless system will lag in terms of achieving the aforementioned high-speed and high-data-rate transmission requirements. . At present, wireless networks are extremely suitable for communications that can be ignored, which are not complicated, do not require security protection, and do not require immediate attention, but these are not attractive. ϋΐ All: Wired network architecture, because the wired network can securely convert multimedia information according to demand. For these reasons, traditional wireless network architectures are rarely considered as an alternative to wired networks. -The greater disadvantage of traditional wireless networks is: available radio frequencies

475321475321

率範圍正逐漸的減少。所謂益 的無線電波(Spectrum),在美 途來劃分其使用範圍,例如: 用頻道、電視及收音機用頻道 它不同的國家中使用,但是在 正確頻率則是依各個國家而不 波範圍内設定所需的頻道數目 線電頻率範圍,即一般所稱 國境内其政府是依據使用用 行動電話用頻道、衛星通訊 等。用途類似的頻道亦在其 各種不同的頻道中所使用的 同。由於是在有限的無線電 ’因此’可使用於無線網路 心隨著展佈頻譜技術的出現,無線網路系統已被發展出 月匕在具有雜訊的環境中提供可信賴的資料傳輸。這些技術 乃使用一個較所需之基頻(Baseband)訊號還要寬大的頻 寬。如此系統在帶有雜訊的無線電頻率中操作時,可以透 過頻率再生組合在其它沒有雜訊的電波中作最有效的利 用。展佈頻f晋已被定義在最新的IEEE標準規範中的電機與 電子篇(第五十版),其定義如下: 種多重處理’或是抗雜訊及抗干擾的調頻技術。展 (例如虛設的雜訊碼),圭^常的j頻$見,色使其g ^ 。接收器在與這些訊號進行交握作用 後補償到原來的訊號大小。 目前大部份的展佈頻譜網路系統都會依賴一個中央基 地台’或一個在預先定義的地區中已具有全數位通訊的主 控無線電波收發器(以下簡稱收發器)。這種形式的無線系 統像是家用無線電話及普通的細胞式行動電話。一般來The rate range is gradually decreasing. The so-called beneficial radio waves (Spectrum) are used in the United States to divide its range of use, such as: Channels, TV and radio channels are used in different countries, but the correct frequency is set in each country and not in the wave range. The required number of channels is the frequency range of the cable, which is generally referred to as the use of mobile phone channels, satellite communications, etc. by the government within the country. Similar-purpose channels are also used in their various channels. Because it is in a limited radio ‘so’ it can be used in wireless networks. With the advent of spread spectrum technology, wireless network systems have been developed to provide reliable data transmission in noisy environments. These technologies use a wider bandwidth than the required baseband signal. When such a system operates in a radio frequency with noise, it can be used most effectively in other radio waves without noise through frequency regeneration combination. Spread frequency has been defined in the latest IEEE Standard Specification for Motors and Electronics (Fifth Edition), which is defined as follows: A multiprocessing or anti-noise and anti-interference frequency modulation technology. (Such as a dummy noise code), the frequency of the j is often seen, and the color is g ^. The receiver compensates to the original signal size after performing a handshake with these signals. At present, most of the spread spectrum network systems rely on a central base station 'or a master radio wave transceiver (hereinafter referred to as a transceiver) that has all-digital communication in a predefined area. This form of wireless system is like home wireless phones and ordinary cellular mobile phones. Usually come

第5頁 475321 五、發明說明(3) 說’這類系統包含至少一個基地台,該基地台會用一種建 立通訊頻道使一個或多個的遙控式或受控受控式的收發器 去進行與主控收發器間的溝通。無論無線電訊號是接收或 ,射,在使用範圍内主控收發器掌握著與每一個動態受控 受控收發器間的連繫環節。因此,每個受控收發器必 須與一個主控收發器配成對。中央A中式網路的一個主要 對的方式經 當在一個已限制無線電波的環 境中進行操作的結果是主控收發器僅能在某一時段内與其 配對之受控收發器進行通訊連繫。當增加同時連網的數目 時,固有的架構會降低每個資料連結的速度,則上述習用 技術才會被激賞。 [發明概要] ,„ 可以減少 k竊聽的危險及避免未經同意的使用無線網路。 有ί ^ Γΐ中::ί點是能夠維持在一無線網路裏具 有一群的收發器,而且在這一無線網路群組裏可以 何兩個甚至更多個收發器間的資料傳輸。 本發明更進-步的優點是能夠將無線網路中 與任何一具的元被 依照本發明,使用於具有至少另_收發裝置之通訊網 本揭露發明之目的是後允許 本發明的另一目的是提出一種安全的無i網路Page 5 475321 V. Description of the invention (3) Says' This type of system contains at least one base station, and the base station will use one to establish a communication channel for one or more remotely controlled or controlled transceivers to perform Communication with the master transceiver. Regardless of whether the radio signal is received or transmitted, the master transceiver controls the link between each dynamically controlled transceiver in the range of use. Therefore, each controlled transceiver must be paired with a master control transceiver. One of the main pairing methods of the Central A Chinese network when operating in an environment where radio waves have been restricted is that the master transceiver can only communicate with its paired controlled transceiver within a certain period of time. When the number of simultaneous networks is increased, the inherent architecture will reduce the speed of each data link, so that the above-mentioned conventional technology will be appreciated. [Summary of the invention], "can reduce the danger of eavesdropping and avoid the use of wireless networks without consent. There are ^ ^ ΐ :: The point is to be able to maintain a group of transceivers in a wireless network, and here A wireless network group can transmit data between two or more transceivers. A further advantage of the present invention is that it can use any element in the wireless network in accordance with the present invention to be used in A communication network with at least another transmitter-receiver device. The purpose of this disclosure is to allow another aspect of the invention to propose a secure i-free network.

475321475321

五、發明說明(4) 路的收發裝置含有中央處理單元(CPU)、展佈頻譜之數位 式數據機及一個收發器。在主控模式中,展佈頻3譜數據機 包括能夠與至少一個其它收發裝置進行請求與初2化資料 連結的裝置,及選定並切換至某一個無線電頻道之裝置 在受控模式中,該展佈頻譜數據機包括能夠债測從至少— 個其它收發器之資料連結的請求’以及至少偵測切換到預 先選定之無線電頻道的請求手段及切換到預先選定之無線 電頻道的手段。藉由操作收發器上的主控模式及受控^、 式,本發明可以在一無線網路内進行任何兩個前述之無線 電裝置間的通動作,因此在前述之網路内可提供分散式 的無線通訊。 ^ 佳實施例中,基地 模組化網路上可具 限手機,但最好不 初始的通訊連結的 可同時操作。而一 應機及(或)話機一 必須依靠無線網路 楚瞭解本發明之内 圖說明,而這些圖 為了可以更清 之詳細說明及相關 中的所有構件: [最佳實施例] 1 · 0系統概述 在本發明的最 模組化網路上,該 1 2個基地台,及無 每個可以電切換到 台及手機被建構為 台可能會同時與回 地台及手機的網路 通訊連結。 容’請參考以下所述 顯示了在此發明應用 台及手機是被建構在 有多個基地台,例如 超過88個手機。如同 單元群組一樣,基地 個或一個以·上的基地 起被建構。該包含基 裝置來處理欲進行之V. Description of the invention (4) The transmitting and receiving device of the channel includes a central processing unit (CPU), a digital modem spreading the spectrum, and a transceiver. In the master control mode, the spread spectrum 3-spectrum modem includes a device capable of requesting connection with primary data with at least one other transceiver device, and a device selected and switched to a certain radio channel. In the controlled mode, the The spread spectrum data machine includes a method capable of testing data links from at least one other transceiver, and at least a request means for switching to a preselected radio channel and a means for switching to a preselected radio channel. By operating the master control mode and the controlled mode on the transceiver, the present invention can perform communication between any two of the aforementioned radio devices in a wireless network, so a decentralized type can be provided in the aforementioned network. Wireless communication. ^ In the preferred embodiment, the base modular network can have a limited number of mobile phones, but it is best to operate simultaneously without the initial communication link. An answering machine and / or a telephone must rely on the wireless network to understand the description of the diagrams of the present invention, and these diagrams are for a clearer detailed description and all the components in the related: [best embodiment] 1 System Overview On the most modular network of the present invention, the 12 base stations, and none of them can be switched to the station and the mobile phone are constructed so that the station may be simultaneously connected to the network communication between the base station and the phone. Please refer to the description below to show that the application and mobile phones in this invention are constructed with multiple base stations, such as more than 88 mobile phones. Like unit groups, bases or more are constructed. The inclusion device is used to process

第7頁 五、發明說明(5) 本發明揭露之基地台與手機組較適合建構在(美國)聯 邦電信委員會(FCC)所規範之ISM頻道中的902至928頻率範 圍内操作。而無線電訊號是使用展佈頻譜傳輸 每個資料框4ms之分時雙工⑽)之方式傳輸 =質。直接順序式展佈頻譜(0^幻的好處在於這種展佈式 架構提供遠距離時較好的接收品質;但,任何一種習用的 都是實施於本發明。習用的展佈頻譜訊號需要-饭的雜訊(PN)碼》較佳且適合使用在展 訊碼是金氏碼,這金氏踽县^1qfi7玍歧丄砰只曰T幻做雜 _所發展出來的碼疋在967年時由羅伯-金(驗" 1 · 1系統方塊圖 I線對協定的實施及設計實現雙向無線電波及 的、iL 且合的信號。請參考圖1,核心模組之a 的在實鈀通訊協定及在無線電通訊 而這裝置27包括中央處理單元内士的^號傳輸 24及無線電波頻率收^機^咖)22 ’展佈頻譜數據機 執行SI:之::在及資料能夠在各群組間 可連接到八A六播带成對使用者之間,同時’仍然保持 父換電話網路(簡 結可能可以免服務費。如 儿且坆二逑 數據機24及中央處理單元本發明的展佈頻譜 定及像本發明之通訊I二,構在很方便提供通訊協 供習用無線電頻率2 訊環境中。收發㈣提 譜數謙及收發器26=::=;,;、展佈頻 衣1選仃通訊連結。在軟體的控 475321 五、發明說明(6) ----- ^ ^,中央處理單元22控制整個展佈頻譜數據機24、收發 ;^其它包括通訊裝置内的習用元件的操作,同時中央 处理單το掌控由展佈頻譜數據機進出的資料的數位信號處 理。.適合前述目的之中央處理單元的形式是由Sunnyvale 的Z i 1 〇g所製造,產品編號為M g 1 Μ。凡熟悉本創作發明 領域之人士皆知,中央處理單元的軟體是一種應用上的規 格而且會根據包括通訊裝置在内的額外元件的規格架構 而改變。 實際上,需要無線通訊的任何通信裝置可以由上述之 無線網路裝置27的方式展現優點。請參考圖2Α及2Β,要形 成一組像上述一樣的通訊裝置之較佳實施例:至少包含一 無線電話基地台28(圖2Α)以作為連結到公共交換式電話網 路、及至少一無線電話手機3〇(圖28)。 請參考圖2Β及圖3,手機30是由常用的手機外殼32, 及包括中央處理單元22以電連接於展佈頻譜數據機24及收 發器26等所構成。 在基地台及手機雙方,發射與接收導線34、36係連接 收發器26及展佈頻譜數據機24之間。天線38連接至收發器 26上,而麥克風4〇、揚聲器42及按鍵44則電連接於中央處 理單元22。加強手機操作能力的全球定位系統(gps)天線 4,6是選用的配備。 圖3所示之手機按鍵44,是由習用的按鍵交又矩陣電 路所構成。手機30的電力是由習用之整流電壓源所提供, 比如像充電電池。Page 7 V. Description of the invention (5) The base station and mobile phone set disclosed in the present invention are more suitable for operation within the frequency range of 902 to 928 in the ISM channel regulated by the (United States) Federal Telecommunications Commission (FCC). The radio signal is transmitted using spread spectrum transmission. Each data frame is 4ms time-division duplex. The direct sequential spread spectrum (0 ^ magic has the advantage that this spread architecture provides better reception quality at long distances; however, any of the conventional ones is implemented in the present invention. Conventional spread spectrum signals require- Rice's Noisy (PN) Code "is better and suitable for use. The Spread Code is King's code. This Jin's County ^ 1qfi7 玍 玍 只 only said that T magic is mixed _ Developed code 疋 in 967 The implementation and design of the wire pair agreement by the Rob-King (Version 1 · 1 System Block Diagram I) achieves two-way radio wave, iL and combined signals. Please refer to Figure 1, the actual palladium of the core module a Communication protocols and radio communications and this device 27 includes the ^ number transmission 24 of the central processing unit and the radio frequency receiver ^ coffee) 22 'spread spectrum data machine to perform SI :::: and data can be Groups can be connected to eight-A, six-player band pairs of users, while 'maintaining a parent-to-phone network (it may be free of service fees. For example, the modem 24 and the central processing unit) The spread spectrum of the invention is like the communication II of the invention, which is very convenient Communication Association for radio frequency 2 in the communication environment. Transceivers, spectrum numbers, and transceivers 26 = :: =;,;, spreading frequency 1 select communication links. In the software control 475321 V. Description of the invention (6 ) ----- ^ ^, the central processing unit 22 controls the entire spread spectrum data machine 24, and sends and receives; ^ other includes the operation of conventional components in the communication device, while the central processing unit το controls the spread spectrum data machine in and out Digital signal processing of data .. The form of the central processing unit suitable for the foregoing purpose is manufactured by Sunnyvale's Zi 10 gram, and the product number is M g 1 Μ. Anyone familiar with the field of this invention knows that the central processing unit The software is an application specification and will change according to the specification structure of additional components including communication devices. In fact, any communication device that requires wireless communication can show its advantages by the above-mentioned wireless network device 27. Please Referring to FIGS. 2A and 2B, a preferred embodiment of a group of communication devices as described above is formed: at least one wireless telephone base station 28 (FIG. 2A) is used as a link to the public exchange type Telephone network and at least one wireless telephone handset 30 (FIG. 28). Please refer to FIG. 2B and FIG. 3. The handset 30 is a commonly-used handset casing 32, and includes a central processing unit 22 electrically connected to the spread spectrum modem. 24 and transceiver 26, etc. At both the base station and the mobile phone, the transmitting and receiving wires 34 and 36 are connected between the transceiver 26 and the spread spectrum data machine 24. The antenna 38 is connected to the transceiver 26, and the microphone 4 〇, speaker 42 and button 44 are electrically connected to the central processing unit 22. Global positioning system (GPS) antennas 4, 6 to enhance the mobile phone's operating capabilities are optional equipment. The mobile phone button 44 shown in Figure 3 is a conventional button It consists of alternating matrix circuits. The power of the mobile phone 30 is provided by a conventional rectified voltage source, such as a rechargeable battery.

475321 五、發明說明(7) 子52^1^示’手機具折合功能’且麥克風40包含在蓋 折合,同時t5i是欽接著麟器並使蓋子上的揚聲器可 體指干^ ,在手機不使用時可保護按鍵44。發光二極 源警告訊息1作K提供超出收訊範圍的提示及低電 為觀ϊ Ξ : ^地台具有一 ^液晶顯示(LCD)螢幕48以作 ί萨據^全球定位系統(GPS)連線情形,同時動 =;1Γ、ΓΓ50 ⑽ 串列m二广σ置在中央處理單元連結到個人電腦上的 串列通Λ阜中(這部分沒顯示)。 基地台28也和手機30 一樣,使用中央處理 “ ==譜數據機24及收發器26。發射與接收導線以、 ==器26及展佈頻譜數據機24之間。天線38連接 :::26上。而麥克風4〇、揚聲器42及按鍵“則電連接 元22。習用之公共交換式電話網路線的外線 Μ面58可使中央處理單元22連接到電話線6〇中。基地台475321 V. Description of the invention (7) Sub 52 ^ 1 ^ shows that the mobile phone has a folding function and the microphone 40 is included in the cover, and at the same time, t5i is a connector and the speaker on the cover can be pointed ^, The button 44 is protected during use. Light-emitting diode source warning message 1 is provided as a reminder for exceeding the receiving range and low power is provided. Ξ: ^ The platform has a ^ liquid crystal display (LCD) screen 48 for 萨 Sa data ^ Global Positioning System (GPS) connection In the case of simultaneous operation, the simultaneous movement =; 1Γ, ΓΓ50 二 The serial m m 广 is placed in the serial link Λfuzhong connected to the central processing unit and connected to the personal computer (this part is not shown). The base station 28 is also the same as the mobile phone 30, and uses the central processing unit "== spectrum data unit 24 and transceiver 26. The transmitting and receiving wires are connected between == 26 unit and spread spectrum data unit 24. Antenna 38 is connected ::: 26. The microphone 40, the speaker 42 and the keys "are electrically connected to the element 22." The external line M plane 58 of the conventional public switched telephone network route allows the central processing unit 22 to be connected to the telephone line 60. Base station

包括一個選購的動態隨機記憶體5〇以作為儲存軟體及J 料,這些储#的軟體及資料提供以答錄機的方式建構中央 處理單元^操作。另㈣’選購的監視器是作為提供額外 的使用者資汛並允許基地台設定的更改。 ,•請參考圖4,一個可供選擇的基地台實施例包括一個 内建有揚聲器6 2及麥克風6 4以提供免持聽統能力的手機 30。當中央處理單元66功能是作為控制器68時,且作 雉持在展佈頻譜數據機24及收發器或模組26之間的通訊連 第10頁 475321 五、發明說明(8) "一"— 結及資料的傳送。 此/卜’當中央處理單元66功能是作為數位訊號處理 (fSP)單元70時,其作用是轉換聲音資訊為類比訊號,以 提供手機、内建的揚聲器及麥克風、電話線、及選購的答 錄機設備等使用。 當通訊網路裝置建構在基地台内部操作時,會包含設 定及使用通訊連結的功能。為達到這樣的功能,收發器2 6 會包含習知使用於展佈頻譜數據機24介面的手段、使用於 中央處理單元22介面的手段,及包含一頻率合成器、一電 源^理控制器、分時雙工開關、BpsK發射調變器、一發射, 訊號回路控制器、一接收訊號回路控制器、及一RSSI量測 裝置。 1 · 2系統架構 包含如上述在圖1-2及4功能方塊圖中的元件,可以許 多不同的方式建構本發明之系統。為圖示本發明的目的, 較佳實施例是一可擴充至七—^^^每一基地台有一 電話線的架構。理論上,可以使用的手機數目沒有限制, =是以一為較佳。系t具有回路切換、 口 。較佳的控制^Includes an optional dynamic random access memory 50 as storage software and data. These software and data storages provide a central processing unit operation in the manner of an answering machine. In addition, the optional monitor is provided to provide additional user resources and allow changes in base station settings. Please refer to FIG. 4. An alternative embodiment of the base station includes a mobile phone 30 with a built-in speaker 6 2 and a microphone 64 to provide hands-free listening capabilities. When the central processing unit 66 functions as the controller 68, and acts as a communication link between the spread spectrum data machine 24 and the transceiver or module 26, page 10 475321 V. Description of the invention (8) " " — Closing and Transfer of Information. When the central processing unit 66 functions as a digital signal processing (fSP) unit 70, its function is to convert sound information into analog signals to provide mobile phones, built-in speakers and microphones, telephone lines, and optional Answering machine equipment, etc. When the communication network device is built to operate inside the base station, it includes functions for setting and using communication links. In order to achieve such a function, the transceiver 2 6 will include a conventional means for spreading the spectrum data machine 24 interface, a means for the central processing unit 22 interface, and a frequency synthesizer, a power supply controller, Time-division duplex switch, BpsK transmitting modulator, a transmitting, a signal loop controller, a receiving signal loop controller, and an RSSI measuring device. 1.2 System Architecture Contains the components in the functional block diagrams of Figures 1-2 and 4 as described above, and the system of the present invention can be constructed in many different ways. For the purpose of illustrating the present invention, the preferred embodiment is an architecture that can be expanded to seven-^^^ each base station has a telephone line. Theoretically, there is no limit to the number of mobile phones that can be used, = one is better. The system t has a circuit switch and a port. Better control ^

Zi log產品,此用於基地台的控制器具有八位元、四十七 個輸入/輸出線、六萬四千位元組的唯讀記憶體、二百五 十六位元組的隨機記憶冑、六個中斷及六個阜架構。而每 -手機有-八位70、三十一個輸入/輪出線、三萬二千位Zi log products, this controller for base station has 8 bits, 47 input / output lines, 64,000 bytes of read-only memory, and 256 bytes of random memory胄, six interruptions and six monarch structures. And each-mobile phone has-eight digits 70, thirty-one input / roundout, thirty-two thousand digits

475321 五、發明說明(9) 元組的唯讀記憶體(可擴充至六萬四千位 六位兀組的隨機記憶體、六個中斷及四、、,)、二百五 的數位訊號處理器包括一十六位元一::架,。基地台 憶體、八位元的類比/數位轉換器、呈、固字元的唯讀记 元頻寬調變之數位/類比轉換器。基步員數;:中斷的十= 一特殊用途積體電路,且這種基 機較適合做成 體電路可提供給習用的展佈頻道的特=的特殊用途f 線電波收發模組像是習用之傳輸線介電f體:路说; ;守著聯邦電信委員會的68條規定。如圖回路:= 括了可按。、1、2、3、4、5、6、7、8、圃9:二不,按鍵包 5、閃爍、握持、内線/頁、重撥、麥克風/靜:# =、 =加/刪除鍵。發光二極體是提供指示低電力)電;、 iim範圍。独駭供音4、振料量、握持、電 記:二習、田重撥、内線/頁、麥克風/靜音、揚聲器及 “。動2 :之1 X 16大小的液晶顯示板可使用於基地 :1由?態隨機記憶體是每一個基地台的標準裝置,而在 疋選配的。動態隨機記憶體以四百萬個位元組的 ^為較佳,以這樣的容量大小可提供六分三十秒的 五、發明說明(10) (DS^3i^延頻譜結構。較佳的礁具*早 處理過程的增V^88 頻寬如圖13中所圖示:在重疊時:之:巧的 較佳位置是刻=〇的地方,伸2是;·二4被:f之次頻道的 道。通訊用次頻道是在N = 1 %疋:"會被2 例中的頻道她备S Η加 ·,24。在較佳實施 1夕J甲旳领運…數疋13個。不管如何,更 可使用於本發明的原理中。假如道二在浐:475321 V. Description of the invention (9) The read-only memory of the tuple (which can be expanded to 64,000 digits of random memory, six interrupts and four, four ,, and two), two hundred and five digital signal processors include Sixteen bit one :: shelf ,. Base station memory, eight-bit analog / digital converter, digital read-only memory with digitized and fixed characters, digital / analog converter with bandwidth modulation. Number of basic steppers :: Interrupted ten = a special-purpose integrated circuit, and this type of base unit is more suitable for making special-purpose circuits that can be provided to the conventional spreading channel = special-purpose f-wire radio wave transceiver modules like Dielectric f-body of conventional transmission line: Lu said;; observe the 68 regulations of the Federal Telecommunications Commission. As shown in the circuit: = can be pressed. , 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9: No, button pack 5, flashing, holding, extension / page, redial, microphone / static: # =, = add / delete key. Light-emitting diodes are designed to provide low-power) electricity; iim range. Solo hacking audio 4, vibration amount, grip, telegram: Er Xi, Tian redial, extension / page, microphone / mute, speaker, and ". 2: 1 x 16 size LCD panel can be used for Base: 1 The random state memory is a standard device for each base station, and is optional in 疋. The dynamic random memory is preferably 4 million bytes, and can be provided with this capacity. Six minutes and thirty seconds Fifth, the description of the invention (10) (DS ^ 3i ^ extended spectrum structure. Better reef * early processing process to increase the V ^ 88 bandwidth as shown in Figure 13: When overlapping: Zhi: The better position is the place where engraved = 0, and the extension 2 is; · 2 4 is: the channel of the secondary channel of f. The secondary channel of communication is N = 1%. &: &Quot; will be in 2 cases. The channel is provided with S, plus 24. In the preferred implementation, J Jia will take delivery of… 13. No matter what, it can be used in the principle of the present invention. If Dao Er is in:

操作範圍内1同時可致動十二個;的 調變器,及一ΡΓΜ . 令系統具有BPSK 48K ±/ PS聲音編碼法,傳送樣本速率是 48K樣本/秒,且傳送資斜 千疋 由PN碼進行編碼。最小的僂逆^ θ jPS、2位元/樣本、並 姑里认士 瑕的傳迗旎1有4個控制水準。主栌 —khX- 1 · 4系統構成方塊 系統方塊圖如圖4所示。 L數位訊號處理器的功能 2·1數位訊號處理器 器 基地台包括一習用之數位訊號處理 475321 五、發明說明(11) 但是在較佳實施例的手機中是沒有數位訊號處理 器的。雖然以下所列功能之一或數個可以藉由展佈頻譜數 據機或控制器來操作’但是以下這些習用功能以數位訊直 理來操作是較適金〇 1 · DTMF 振音 I生及 H: 〇,1,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,9 4,#,A,B,C,D··· 2.旁通; ___· 3· :撥話振音,鈐響振音,忙線中振 音,通話; 4·其待機振音,線上保 持之音樂聲,靜振音,對方傳回之鈴響振音,及重撥之撥 話振音; 5· 在典型的10Kbps或7Kbps有使用或 沒有使用無聲偵測來進行資料的壓縮,同時在26Kbps時是 直接通過; 6· Ly講話4生器; 7. LPC振音產生器;及 , ~^ 2.2展佈頻譜(基頻)數據機 :請參考圖5Α及5Β,以下將描述包括在本發明之展佈頻 譜數據機24中的電路72功能方塊圖。電路72較好是二可程 式化的、單晶片、直接順序式展佈頻譜(1)%3)數據機電 路’且這電路提供所有的調變、BPSK編瑪、展佈、倒頻、Within the operating range, 1 can actuate twelve modulators at the same time, and a ΓΓ. Make the system have BPSK 48K ± / PS voice coding method, the transmission sample rate is 48K samples / second, and the transmission data is oblique. To encode. The smallest inverse ^ θ jPS, 2 bits / sample, and the first pass of the flaws have 4 control levels. The main block —khX- 1 · 4 system configuration block The system block diagram is shown in Figure 4. Functions of the L digital signal processor 2.1 Digital signal processor The base station includes a conventional digital signal processing 475321 V. Description of the invention (11) However, there is no digital signal processor in the mobile phone of the preferred embodiment. Although one or more of the functions listed below can be operated by spread spectrum modems or controllers, these conventional functions are more suitable for digital signal operation. 0 DTMF vibrator I and H : 〇, 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 4,4, #, A, B, C, D ··· 2. Bypass; ___ · 3 ·: Dial tone, 钤Ringing tones, ringing during busy lines, and calls; 4. Standby ringing tones, music on-line, static ringing, ringing ringing tones returned by the other party, and dialing redialing; 5. Typical 10Kbps or 7Kbps with or without the use of silent detection for data compression, while passing directly at 26Kbps; 6. Ly speech 4 generator; 7. LPC vibration generator; and, ~ ^ 2.2 spread Spectrum (fundamental frequency) modem: Please refer to FIGS. 5A and 5B. The functional block diagram of the circuit 72 included in the spread spectrum modem 24 of the present invention will be described below. Circuit 72 is preferably two programmable, single-chip, direct-sequence spread spectrum (1)% 3) data electrical circuits ’and this circuit provides all modulation, BPSK editing, spreading, frequency-reversing,

475321 五、發明說明(12) 分時雙工控制、AFC、BPSK解碼及時序需求給直接順序式 展佈頻譜系統。這電路也提供一個介面給無線電波模組26 在線34、36(圖2A)與中央處理單元22在線23(圖2A)間使 用。 前述圖示意指在手機裝置或終端羞〜置中都將 。電路 台,疋手機)可收碼,如圖5A所示之A接 收器74、B接收器76。這使得本發明之系統能夠具備無 線、三方同時進行電話會議的能力。 Μ 直接順序式展佈頻譜數據機主控器時脈78 (使用前段 敘述之電路),在^^捕“時操作會較好。這使用頻率是 相同於無線電波模組26中使用之參考用振盪器頻率。 =制器設定數個泛用的輸入/輸出以控制無線電波模 組26的-些功能,參考圖^中的介面部 >,其定義如下: ,接腳控制電力放大器的輸出水平;四接腳組合成串列 :傳時脈垃資#、閃頻器及晶片選擇;及三接腳用來管理 在傳迗、接收及合成器三部分的電源開/關。 *76基Ϊ ί ί順序式展!括兩個接收器74 — 二——〜一。前述裝置已顯示佈镅後的 tJf 時 A良I、、AGC 5 斷了 匕。傳送資料路徑由_ 厂^·^ 一^厂 轉換器、倒頻器(Scrambler)、微分的解石弓、,1串歹、 (:响、及調變器所組成。接收資解料:由二^^ 數位之轉換器、用頻率補償插入的數位修正器由== 第15頁 475321 五、發明說明(13) ^ : f倒頻器及一串列轉並列的轉換器。倒頻器/解倒頻 器是一個比十六位元之PN碼連續產生器的最大長度還長的 倒頻裝置°它的輸出格式在倒頻時為互斥或(XORed)帶著 資料’在解倒頻時為互斥或(XORed)帶著Rx資料。只有 聲音及監控位元會被倒頻。PN碼連績產生器的起始位置是 可程式化的’其可程式的方式是用一塊應對著暫存器的記 憶體與ID暫存器在一起。這起始位置是用在每個倒頻 用的τχ資料框及解倒頻用的RX資料框起始點之pN產生器的 初始化。PN產生器的MSB則用於倒頻/解倒頻。倒頻/解 倒頻的第個框位元使用MSB的初始值。倒頻/解倒頻可 經由中央處理單元22來決定致動與否。 Θ 3^de)的能 同-,非苓位元時,編碼 器尤楚立^ 一_一、、 ,在BPS/中,資料符號(data symb〇1)會在固定間隔藉 由載波訊號裏180度相位偏移或逆轉的存在或不存而被推 導出。相位偏移表示由1到〇或〇到丨的狀態變化。因 資料是以微分方式編碼,所以提供了上述決定兩種可= 態中的那一個是被預定的方法。 匕狀 為了使直接順序式展佈頻譜系統能符合聯邦電 會的第十五條規定,ί 佈瑪的週期是31次的編碼資料。這些碼的, 在編碼位元的邊界。展佈碼可由控制器來推 Μ — Ρ疋 σ π%订S又疋。在主475321 V. Description of the invention (12) Time-sharing duplex control, AFC, BPSK decoding and timing requirements are provided for direct sequential spread spectrum systems. This circuit also provides an interface for the radio wave module 26 to be used between lines 34, 36 (Fig. 2A) and the central processing unit 22 at line 23 (Fig. 2A). The aforementioned diagram schematically indicates that the mobile phone device or terminal will be placed in the center. Circuit station, mobile phone) can receive code, as shown in Figure 5A A receiver 74, B receiver 76. This enables the system of the present invention to have the ability of a wireless, three-party simultaneous conference call. Μ Directly spreading the spectrum controller main controller clock 78 (using the circuit described in the previous paragraph), the operation will be better when capturing ^^. This uses the same frequency as the reference used in the radio wave module 26 Oscillator frequency. = The controller sets several general-purpose inputs / outputs to control some functions of the radio wave module 26. Refer to the interface section in Figure ^ and its definition is as follows:, the pin controls the output of the power amplifier Level; four pins combined into a series: pass time pulse #, flasher and chip selection; and three pins are used to manage the power on / off in the three parts of the transmitter, receiver and synthesizer. * 76Base Ϊ ί ίSequential exhibition! Including two receivers 74 — two-~ one. The above device has shown tJf after the deployment. A good I, AGC 5 broke the dagger. The transmission data path is by _ 厂 ^ · ^ A factory converter, a scrambler, a differential calculus bow, a string of cymbals, a ringer, and a modulator. Receiving materials: a converter with two digits, a frequency Compensating the inserted digital corrector == Page 15 475321 V. Description of the invention (13) ^: f scrambler and a string A parallel-to-parallel converter. The inverter / de-inverter is an inverse frequency device longer than the maximum length of a 16-bit PN code continuous generator. Its output format is mutually exclusive or ( (XORed) with data 'is mutually exclusive when descrambling or (XORed) with Rx data. Only the sound and monitoring bits will be reversed. The starting position of the PN code succession generator is programmable' The programmable way is to use a memory corresponding to the register and the ID register together. This starting position is the starting point of the τχ data frame used for each cepstrum and the RX data frame used for descrambling. Initialization of the pN generator. The MSB of the PN generator is used for scrambling / descrapping. The first frame bit of the scrambling / descrapping uses the initial value of MSB. The scrambling / descrapping can be processed by the central processing unit. Unit 22 determines whether to actuate or not. Θ 3 ^ de) can be the same as-, when the bit is not a bit, the encoder is particularly ^ __, 1,, in BPS /, the data symbol (data symb〇1) Will be deduced at fixed intervals by the presence or absence of a 180-degree phase shift or reversal in the carrier signal. The phase shift means from 1 to 0 or To the state change. Since the data is coded in a differential way, it provides a method to determine which of the two possible states above is predetermined. The dagger is designed to make the direct-sequence spread spectrum system compatible with the Federal Electrical Association. Article 15 stipulates that the period of the code is 31 times of coded data. These codes are at the boundary of the coded bits. The spreading code can be pushed by the controller to M — ρ 疋 σ π% order S and 疋. In the main

第16頁 475321 五、發明說明(14) 控裝置重置時,所有碼會設成零。 傳送用的資料較佳是以微分方式編碼,然後用PN碼展 佈。展佈資料以AC連結到無線電波模組之上位轉換調變器 為較佳。 從餐線電波之基頻帶(baseband)的同相(I )及反相(Q) 〜 --------------—— 一 ---------------------一 訊係在lHijihz頻Μ,同時用一位元的快閃類比/ 數位轉換器轉換成數位訊號,這也成為硬體上的限制。 , ~~~~~~ —--------、------— -----—— 基本的數位通訊電話(DCT)系統由一手機及基地台所 組成。AFC的任務是保持兩個系統即使是在不同的振盪時 脈操作時也必須是同步狀態。時脈的調整是由AFC迴圈來 執行,而這調整工作不需要任何控制器的輸入。頻率誤差 估計是用來修正在接收頻道中的數值控制振盪器(NCO)。Page 16 475321 V. Description of the invention (14) When the control device is reset, all codes will be set to zero. The data for transmission is preferably differentially encoded and then distributed using a PN code. It is better that the display materials are AC-connected to the radio wave module's upper conversion modulator. From the in-phase (I) and reverse-phase (Q) of the baseband of the radio wave ~ ------------------ one ----------- ---------- Yixun is at lHijihz frequency M. At the same time, a one-bit flash analog / digital converter is used to convert it into a digital signal. This has also become a hardware limitation. , ~~~~~~ ----------, -------- --------- The basic digital communication telephone (DCT) system consists of a mobile phone and a base station. The task of the AFC is to keep the two systems synchronized even when operating at different oscillatory clocks. The clock adjustment is performed by the AFC loop, and this adjustment does not require any input from the controller. Frequency error estimation is used to modify the numerically controlled oscillator (NCO) in the receiving channel.

當接收資料時,系統會決定以某一特定值作為接收的 位元,同時決定用在AFC的頻率誤差估計。而j料會藉 者下列公式表示資料解調變 的計算方式: 點結果=1*1(延遲一位元的時脈)+Q*Q(延遲一位元的 ^—----^^^〜——---— 時脈) * 任何時間皆可由中央讓^。訊盤幫助決定 - ——~— ~~〜—〜----- 在通$雙友jL間#距離及調整功率放大器的設定。When receiving data, the system decides to use a certain value as the received bit, and also determines the frequency error estimation used in AFC. And j is expected to use the following formula to indicate the calculation method of data demodulation: Point result = 1 * 1 (delayed clock by one bit) + Q * Q (delayed by ^ -------- ^^ ^ ~ ——---- Clock) * Central can give up at any time ^. The information board helps to determine----- ~~~~~~~~ ---- In the distance between the two pairs of double jL and adjust the settings of the power amplifier.

第17頁 475321 . 五、發明說明(15) 系統也包括一分時雙工控制器(TDDC)82來掌控著所有 工控^制_n結一 t時雙士器狀^暫存 ^始$所需的工作項目。 一無線電波模組26較佳的是一習用之傳送器與接收器的 組合’這種組合可以提供所有需要在902至928ΜΗΖ進行數 位通訊的換功 能。 —· ~ f線電波模組的最佳化狀態是在分時雙工(TDD)中操 作。這結構由一個作為接收用具有的可變增益調變器九十 度相位差的下載轉換器&、作為傳送用的二進位相位偏移 鍵的(BPSK)調變器與功率放A||、及作為本地振盪(L〇)產 生器用的鎖相迴圈(PLL)頻率合成器等所組成。直接轉換 結構具有簡易的濾波需求及減少元件數目與成本等兩項功 能。 、 的線電波模組基頻介面提供-與基頻數據機間 :;: ϊ:、與作為接收與傳送資料用控制器間的無干 ϊίΐ進制作用間的無干擾連結。㈣基頻數據機 波模組之電源管理控制。無線電波介面 .與電池連結的方式早供應的電源介面則設計成直 器更ΐ:,在操作過程中符合預設的天線比無線電選台 對於-個數位式無線電對講機(DWI)的應用例來說,Page 17 475321. V. Description of the invention (15) The system also includes a time-division duplex controller (TDDC) 82 to control all industrial control systems. Required work items. A radio wave module 26 is preferably a conventional transmitter-receiver combination. This combination can provide all the switching functions that require digital communication between 902 and 928 MHz. — · ~ The f-wire radio module is optimized for operation in time division duplex (TDD). This structure consists of a download converter & with a 90-degree phase difference as a variable gain modulator for reception, a BPSK modulator as a binary phase shift key for transmission, and a power amplifier A || And a phase-locked loop (PLL) frequency synthesizer used as a local oscillator (LO) generator. The direct conversion structure has two functions, such as simple filtering requirements and reducing the number of components and cost. The basic frequency interface of the line radio module provides a non-interference connection between the baseband modem and the baseband modem:; :: and the non-interference between the controller as a controller for receiving and transmitting data. ㈣Power management of baseband modem module. Radio wave interface. The power supply interface that is connected to the battery is designed to be straighter: the antenna that meets the presets during operation is better than the radio selection for a digital radio intercom (DWI) application example. Say,

475321 五、發明說明(16) 所包含之直接順序式展佈頻譜(DSSS)基頻數據機最佳是一 單晶片(具有DSP可供選擇)及數個通用的周邊裝置如按 鍵、發光二極體、麥克風、振盪器等等,就足以製造出一 完整的DSSS DWI系統。不需要其它額外支援的晶片,就可 以讓使用者設計一個最低之總成本的系統。 3. 1 技術内容說明 圖7所示為RF 915MHZ直接轉換為收發機模組之功能方 塊圖。其特性表現、及功能形式決定何群組如以下所列: 1. 具I/Q基頻帶輸出之直接轉換接收器; 3. 4. 2. 直接轉換微分的BPSK(DBPSK)傳輸調變器; 作為分時雙工用之快速切換半雙工結構; 器 具有串歹,J可程式介面之頻率靈敏的超高頻合成 5. 6. 7· 8· 9· 10· 11· 12· 13. 高、中及低功率發射輸出位準; 902-928MHZ無線電頻率操作範圍· 符合f國聯邦電信委員會第十五款要求; 電源管理以便供應最小電流; 單一供應之電壓:3.〇_4 8伏特. 小尺寸模組:3.〇英时χ1 •对 低雜訊; ^ υ · b央吋, 大動態範圍;及 在VBATT = 3.6伏特時 模式:90毫安培;(b)TX模1 ·、/的電源消耗如下(a)RX 率-140毫安培;高功率—〇"古功率一120毫安培;中功 〇笔女培;(c)睡眠模式:3毫安475321 V. Description of the invention (16) The direct sequential spread spectrum (DSSS) baseband modem is preferably a single chip (with a DSP to choose from) and several general peripheral devices such as buttons and light emitting diodes. Body, microphone, oscillator, etc., are enough to make a complete DSSS DWI system. No additional chips are required, allowing users to design a system with the lowest total cost. 3. 1 Description of Technical Contents Figure 7 shows the functional block diagram of RF 915MHZ directly converted into transceiver module. Its characteristic performance and function form determine which groups are listed as follows: 1. Direct conversion receiver with I / Q baseband output; 3. 4. 2. Direct conversion differential BPSK (DBPSK) transmission modulator; As a fast-switching half-duplex structure for time-division duplexing; the device has a string, J programmable frequency-sensitive UHF synthesis 5. 6. 7 · 8 · 9 · 10 · 11 · 12 · 13. High , Medium and low power transmission output levels; 902-928MHZ radio frequency operating range · Meets the requirements of the Federal Telecommunications Commission of the fifteenth country; power management to supply the minimum current; single supply voltage: 3.0-4.8 volts. Small size module: 3.0 Hours χ1 • For low noise; ^ υ · b central inches, large dynamic range; and at VBATT = 3.6 volts mode: 90 mA; (b) TX mode 1 ·, / The power consumption is as follows: (a) RX rate-140 mA; high power-0 " ancient power-120 mA; middle power 0 pen female;

圓 第 19 ^ ---- 475321 五、發明說明(17) 培(最大)。 請參考圖6 ’基頻數位資料輸入訊號TXDATA84,在86 及藉由DBPSK調變器88往上轉換到無線電波時都有過濾作 用。高、中、或低功率放大器(PA)的輸出功率位準是可以 在經由TXPWR控制線在92位置進行選擇,圖示為控制線90 之一個實施例。功率放大器則非常地穩定。 功率放大器的輸出在94為一低通濾波作用,目的是去 除讀波’然後在天線阜98到天線3 8之輸出模組前,通過發 射/接收(T/R)96開關。 〇 從天線阜98到無線電波頻寬濾波器100,無線電波訊 號^經過發射/接收開關9 6。而在低雜訊放大器(LNA )丨〇 2 之前會過濾雜訊,使得訊號在9〇2至928 MHZ外變的稀少。 使用一相對稱的混合器對1〇4、丨〇6及作為L〇訊號用的角度 相位分離器1 08來完成向下轉換到九十度相位差的基頻訊 號、。而九十度相位差的基頻訊號會經過低通濾波丨丨〇及高 通;慮波11 2過遽’其目的是為了減少頻道外的雜訊及去除 低頻(下載至直流)的能量元件。 藉由一個可程式化的鎖相迴圈(PLL)頻率合成器114可 產$無線電波10。經由模組迴圈濾波器11 6與電壓控制振 ,器(VCO)li8電路、外部參考振盪器12〇,及頻率合成器 泰式122來決定合成器表現的參數。在這應用實例中,迴 圈濾波器及電壓控制振盪器的設計是最佳化。 ^藉由ΤΧΕΝ124、RXEN12 6及SYNEN128的控制,可以分別 提供發射迴路、接收迴路、及頻率合成器之獨立的電源Round No. 19 ^ ---- 475321 V. Description of the invention (17) Training (maximum). Please refer to FIG. 6 ′ The baseband digital data input signal TXDATA84 has a filtering function at 86 and when it is converted to radio waves by the DBPSK modulator 88. The output power level of the high, medium, or low power amplifier (PA) can be selected at position 92 via the TXPWR control line, which is shown as an example of control line 90. The power amplifier is very stable. The output of the power amplifier is a low-pass filter at 94, the purpose is to remove the read wave 'and then pass the transmit / receive (T / R) 96 switch before the antenna module 98 to the antenna 38 output module. 〇 From the antenna 98 to the radio wave bandwidth filter 100, the radio wave signal ^ passes the transmitting / receiving switch 96. Noise is filtered before the low noise amplifier (LNA), and the signal becomes scarce outside 902 to 928 MHZ. A symmetrical pair of mixers 104 and 106 and an angle phase separator 108 for the LO signal are used to complete the down-conversion to a fundamental frequency signal with a phase difference of ninety degrees. The fundamental frequency signal with a phase difference of ninety degrees will be subjected to low-pass filtering and high-pass filtering; the purpose of wave 11 2 is to reduce noise outside the channel and remove low-frequency (download to DC) energy components. Radio waves 10 are produced by a programmable phase-locked loop (PLL) frequency synthesizer 114. Through the module loop filter 116 and voltage control oscillator (VCO) li8 circuit, external reference oscillator 120, and frequency synthesizer Thai 122 to determine the parameters of the synthesizer performance. In this application example, the design of the loop filter and voltage controlled oscillator is optimized. ^ With the control of TXE124, RXEN12 6 and SYNEN128, it can provide independent power for the transmitting loop, receiving loop, and frequency synthesizer respectively.

第20頁 475321 五、發明說明(18) 控制。當所有的功能從電壓供給狀態被關閉,那就 電流即將耗盡而使用備用電《,例如電池所剩容量最 大疋3毫安培時。 控制器68是無線對講機的心臟。控制器提供無線對講 2系統所需的功能。這些功能是被崁入在國際標準組織參 模式中的第_、二及第二層協定。這些功能包括系統初 始化、像按鍵一樣的高位準電話特徵、發光二極體、開 關、液晶顯示器(選購配備)、PCM處理器的控制、電話線 "面的控制、數位訊號處理器處理過程的控制、手機與基 ,台,間的通訊協定及訊號化、手機與手機之間的通訊協 疋及Λ號化、及無線電波模組的控制。控制器的軟體 是使用微處理器進行編碼,由Z i i 〇 g公司所製造的二體心圭 號Z891 65可使用於前述的應用情況。除了内建於Z89c〇〇的 功能外’數位訊號處理器的軟體可以依據需求來改變一些 特徵/功能。 4·1第一、二及第三層的功能 4· 1· 1第二』功 為符合國際標準組織參考模式,第一層功能包括通訊 ,例如分時雙工的 掘取、嗔醒/睡眠循環、包含訊號資料的多工與解多工; 某它第一層功能尚包括直接順序控制、雙向連結通訊設定 與控制、連結保持、及倒頻/解倒頻(演算、ΡΝ圖案產生、 及資料方面應用)。 倒頻器常使用於資料安全方面的用途;當資料沒有以Page 20 475321 V. Description of the invention (18) Control. When all the functions are turned off from the voltage supply state, the current will be exhausted and the backup power will be used, for example, when the remaining capacity of the battery is 疋 3 mA. The controller 68 is the heart of the radio. The controller provides the functions required by the wireless intercom 2 system. These functions are incorporated into the _, _, and __ second-level agreements in the International Organization for Standards Participation Model. These functions include system initialization, high-level telephone features like keys, light-emitting diodes, switches, LCD display (optionally equipped), PCM processor control, telephone line control, digital signal processor processing Control, communication protocols and signaling between mobile phones and base stations, Taiwan, and Taiwan, communication protocols between mobile phones and mobile phones, Λ numbering, and control of radio wave modules. The controller's software is coded using a microprocessor, and the two-body heart number Z891 65 manufactured by Ziegog can be used for the aforementioned applications. In addition to the functions built into the Z89c〇〇, the software of the digital signal processor can change some features / functions as required. The functions of the first, second, and third layers of 4.1 · 4.1 · 1 · Second 'are in accordance with the International Standards Organization reference mode. The functions of the first layer include communication, such as time-division duplex mining, wake / sleep Cyclic, multiplexing and demultiplexing with signal data; some other first-level functions include direct sequence control, two-way link communication setting and control, link hold, and cepst / despread (calculation, PN pattern generation, and Data applications). Inverters are often used for data security purposes.

475321 五、發明說明(19) ' ---- 1、〇的適當數字表示及接收器無法與接收的資料流同步; 減少多重路徑或内部符號干涉問題(ISI)(這用法=似於在 電話數據機中倒頻的使用);使訊號頻譜變白是為了增加 在一般規則下可被允許的發射器功率位準;訝於 曰一 零的平均資料值或一固定的直流位準的系統;益波 組的初始化;調變開始/停止;解調變開始/停:線= 傳送開/關;及無線電接收開/關。 ”、 4· 1· 2第二層功能 ^合目際標準组織模< ,由巾央處理單元所執行的 第二;安全碼i測及交据^ 4 · 1 · 3第三層功能475321 V. Description of the invention (19) '---- 1. Appropriate digital representation and receiver cannot synchronize with the received data stream; Reduce multiple paths or internal symbol interference problem (ISI) The use of scrambling in modems); whitening the signal spectrum is to increase the transmitter power level that can be allowed under general rules; surprised at the average data value of zero or a fixed DC level system Initialization of Yibo group; modulation start / stop; demodulation start / stop: line = transmission on / off; and radio reception on / off. "4, 1 · 2 second-layer functions ^ conform to the standard organization model <, the second; executed by the central processing unit; security code i test and receipt ^ 4 · 1 · 3 third-layer functions

y夺合國際標準組織模式,由中央處理單元所執行 第土末碼重 撥·線、快;靜音 S 曰期 '撥號、來話者識 :、低電源、超出收訊範圍、靜音、充電中等振音' 音、呼叫振音、⑯電源警告聲、超出收訊範y Complies with the international standard organization mode, and is executed by the central processing unit to redial the code, line, and fast; mute S date dialing, caller identification: low power, out of range, mute, charging 'Vibration sound', call sound, power warning sound, out of range

季4荨,f公共;鈴聲;Q 打jAAAij 閉聽筒 ,聽控体 / 無線;.數^ 第22頁 475321Season 4 net, f public; ringtone; Q hit jAAAij closed earpiece, listener / wireless ;. number ^ page 22 475321

度管理偵測;j責债測; 二值化設定;資料管理;LPC通話產生; ,聲音訊息聲TtfiT¥^i 〆一制—^及曰效㊂己憶體管理。 4·一^ 此 t發明之較佳實施例是適合在以下的操作順序,以便 能夠從基地台發話;從手機發話;從基地台回答撥入的電 話;從手機回答撥入的電話;基地台呼叫手機;手機呼叫 基地台;記憶體管理程式化;進行内線互打;自動及/或 手動中斷插入;聲音訊息紀錄;聲音訊息播放;聲音訊息 的擦除/刪除;及聲音訊息的遙控存取。 有關這些操作的詳細協定如後所敘述。 4 · 3外線介面 本發明之較佳實施例也支援下列生介面: jU振鈴谓測;dtmf聲音產生及偵測;打開聽筒與關閉聽 筒控制;延後再撥;聽筒閃爍指示;保留(保留時有音 樂);音調/脈衝撥號;及來電號碼識別(CLID)。 4· 4控制器與直接順序式展佈頻譜(DSSS)數據機間的 介面 如圖7的功能方塊圖所示,使用在控制器68與!)3%數 據機24♦間介面的訊息是:八位元位址資料匯流排(位址/資 料)130、位址觀測器(AS) 132、讀八寫134、晶片選擇 (CS)136、資料觀測器(DS)138、及中斷1 40-1 42。Management management detection; j liability measurement; binary setting; data management; LPC call generation;, voice message sound TtfiT ¥ ^ i 〆 一 制 — ^ and said effective management. 4. · ^ The preferred embodiment of this invention is suitable for the following operation sequence, so as to be able to speak from the base station; speak from the mobile phone; answer the incoming call from the base station; answer the incoming call from the mobile phone; base station Calling a cell phone; calling a base station from a cell phone; programming memory management; performing internal calls; automatically and / or manually interrupting insertions; voice message recording; voice message playback; voice message erasure / deletion; and remote access to voice messages . The detailed agreement on these operations is described later. 4 · 3 Outside Line Interface The preferred embodiment of the present invention also supports the following raw interfaces: jU ring detection; dtmf sound generation and detection; turn on and off the handset control; delay redialing; handset flashing indication; reserved (when reserved) With music); tone / pulse dialing; and caller number identification (CLID). The interface between the 4.4 controller and the direct sequential spread spectrum (DSSS) modem is shown in the functional block diagram of Figure 7. It is used in the controller 68 and!) The interface between the 3% modem 24 and the message is: 8-bit address data bus (address / data) 130, address observer (AS) 132, read eight write 134, chip select (CS) 136, data observer (DS) 138, and interrupt 1 40- 1 42.

第23頁 475321 五、發明說明(21) 控制器經由讀/寫外部記憶體的方式與特殊用途積體 電路(AS 1C)進行溝通。以下圖示為記憶體映對情形: 位址 8000+HH 讀(從數據機到控制器) 寫(受控裝置到數據機) 00 無 PNO R1 xxxBBBBB 01 無 PN1 R1 xxxBBBBB 02 無 PN2 R1 xxxBBBBB 03 無 PN3 R1 xxxBBBBB 04 無 PN4 R1 xxxBBBBB 05 無 PN5 R1 xxxBBBBB 06 無 PN6 R1 xxxBBBBB 07 無 PN7 R1 xxxBBBBB 10 命令暫存器 命令暫存器 11 狀態暫存器 無 12 NCO值(低位元組) NCO值(低位元組) 13 NCO值(高位元組) NCO值(高位元組) 14 電源 追蹤門檻 15 交錯/FD(低位元組) 無 16 交錯/FD(高位元組) 無 17 搜尋延遲 18 RXFIFO 碼時脈插入 19 無 TXFIFO 1A CODEC輸出 CODEC輸入 1B 八個輸入阜 八個輸出阜 1C 無 無 1D 鍵盤解碼器位元組1 無 1E 鍵盤解碼器位元組2 無 1F 鍵盤解碼器位元組3 無 8080-80FF 記憶體 記憶體Page 23 475321 V. Description of the invention (21) The controller communicates with the special purpose integrated circuit (AS 1C) by reading / writing external memory. The following figure shows the memory mapping situation: Address 8000 + HH Read (from modem to controller) Write (controlled device to modem) 00 No PNO R1 xxxBBBBB 01 No PN1 R1 xxxBBBBB 02 No PN2 R1 xxxBBBBB 03 No PN3 R1 xxxBBBBB 04 without PN4 R1 xxxBBBBB 05 without PN5 R1 xxxBBBBB 06 without PN6 R1 xxxBBBBB 07 without PN7 R1 xxxBBBBB 10 command register command register 11 status register without 12 NCO value (low byte) NCO value (low byte) Tuple) 13 NCO value (high byte) NCO value (high byte) 14 power tracking threshold 15 interlace / FD (low byte) none 16 interlace / FD (high byte) none 17 search delay 18 RXFIFO code clock Insert 19 No TXFIFO 1A CODEC output CODEC input 1B Eight inputs Fu eight outputs Fu 1C No No 1D Keyboard decoder byte 1 No 1E Keyboard decoder byte 2 No 1F Keyboard decoder byte 3 No 8080- 80FF memory

第24頁 475321 五、發明說明(22) 4. 4. 2. 1輸入/輸出阜名稱 下圖所示為輸入/輸出阜名稱的設定: 輸入/輸 出阜名稱 輸入或 輸出 訊息描述 控制器在 PLCC44 包 裝中的腳位 P00 輸出 LE(無線電波合成器) 14 P01 輸出 資料(無線電波合成器) 15 P02 輸出 時脈(無線電波合成器) 16 P03 輸出 電源關閉碼(0 :關,1 :開) 18 P04 輸出 19 P05 輸出 20 P06 輸出 BB電源關閉 21 P07 輸出 BB軟體重置 22 P10 輸入/輸出 A0/D0 23 P11 輸入/輸出 A1/D1 24 P12 輸入/輸出 A2/D2 25 P13 輸入/輸出 A3/D3 26 P14 輸入/輸出 A4/D4 27 P15 輸入/輸出 A5/D5 29 P16 輸入/輸出 A6/D6 30 P17 輸入/輸出 A7/D7 31 P20 輸出 SYNEN 34 P21 TXPWR0 35 P22 TXPWR1 36 P23 振鈐偵測 37 P24 延遲控制(打開聽筒/關閉聽筒) 38 P25 SCL(電子可抹除式唯讀記憶體) 40 P26 SDA(電子可抹除式唯讀記憶體) 41 P27 WP(電子可抹除式唯讀記憶體) 42 P31 輸入 中斷IRQ2 43 P32 輸入 中斷IRQ0 13 P33 輸入 中斷IRQ1 33 . P34 輸出 /DM 32 P35 發光二極體0 11 P36 蜂鳴器(振鈐電流) 44 P37 發光二極體1 4Page 24 475321 V. Description of the invention (22) 4. 4. 2. 1 Input / output Fu name The following figure shows the setting of input / output Fu name: Input / output Fu name Input or output message description The controller is in PLCC44 Pins in the package P00 output LE (radio wave synthesizer) 14 P01 output data (radio wave synthesizer) 15 P02 output clock (radio wave synthesizer) 16 P03 output power off code (0: off, 1: on) 18 P04 output 19 P05 output 20 P06 output BB power off 21 P07 output BB software reset 22 P10 input / output A0 / D0 23 P11 input / output A1 / D1 24 P12 input / output A2 / D2 25 P13 input / output A3 / D3 26 P14 input / output A4 / D4 27 P15 input / output A5 / D5 29 P16 input / output A6 / D6 30 P17 input / output A7 / D7 31 P20 output SYNEN 34 P21 TXPWR0 35 P22 TXPWR1 36 P23 Vibration detection 37 P24 delay control (on / off handset) 38 P25 SCL (electronic erasable read-only memory) 40 P26 SDA (electronic erasable read-only memory) 41 P27 WP (electronic erasable read-only memory) Body) 42 P31 The interrupt IRQ2 43 P32 input interrupt IRQ0 13 P33 input interrupt IRQ1 33. P34 Output / DM 32 P35 0 11 P36 LED buzzer (vibration seal current) diode emitting diode 44 P37 14

第25頁 475321 五、發明說 4· 下 ,頻譜(D 4. 數 且這暫 裏面的 11,904 開始位 置量。 以下將 式期間 將結果 假 的值如 明(23) --- 4 · 3控制器到特殊用途積體電路的資料 列次章節將描述從中央處理單元到直接順序式展佈 5 S S)數據機的資料傳送。 4·3·1數值控制振盪器之頻率偏置 值控制振盪器(NCO) 1 46是一個十六位元的暫存器, 存器明確指定在兩個手機間的頻率偏置。在暫存器 值是2的補數,LSB等效值為 ’ 0 00/ 1 0*2 16 = 18· 16Hz。藉由控制器及在rx資料框 置之刖所載入到數值控制振盪器的值來估計頻率偏 在初始化期間主要進行連結設定與通訊模式設定,, 圖示與數值控制振盪器索引相關的數值。在通話模 為了接收資料’數值控制振盪器會重新計算且優先 載入到數據機中。 如索引0的偏置是〇Hz,則每個數值控制振盪器索引 下圖所示: 數值控 制振盪 器索引 0 1 -1 2 -2 3 -3 4 -4 十六進 」立值 0 044D I 7BB3 089A F766 0CE7 F319 1134 EECC 1 假如索引0的偏置是555H(25K Hz),則每個數值控制 帑盈器索引的值如下圖所示: · 數值拐 制振鹽 _器索引 L 〇 1 -1 2 -2 3 -3 4 -4, 十六il 位值 1 0555 05C3 04E7 0631 0479 069F 040B 070D 039D 1 i Η i 1 I 1 1 1 s s Η 1 第26頁 475321 五、發明說明(24) 4. 4. 3. 2雜訊(PN)產生器 雜訊產生器用來產生的^_^碼以傳 在展佈頻譜數據機中的1 48方塊,有 八個雜訊產生器PNO、PN1、PN2…PN7。每一個雜訊產生器 由兩個5位元暫存器所組成,分別為Rl、R2。R2暫存器的 硬體接線位置是11111。資料載入到R1暫存器的方式是依 靠檢出是奇通訊頻道或是偶通訊頻道,就像下表所列一 樣。 各雜訊產生器的R1資料 PN0 PN1 PN2 PN3 PN4 PN5 PN6 PN7 奇 00010 00100 00110 10000 10010 10100 10110 11001 偶 00001 00011 01110 10011 10111 11000 11100 11110Page 25 475321 V. Invention 4 · The frequency spectrum (D 4. Count and the starting position of 11,904 in this time. During the following equation, the result will be as false (23) --- 4 · 3 controller The chapter on data listings for special-purpose integrated circuits will describe the data transfer from the central processing unit to the direct sequential spread 5 SS) modem. 4. · 3 · 1 Frequency Offset of Numerical Control Oscillator The value-controlled oscillator (NCO) 1 46 is a sixteen-bit register that specifies the frequency offset between two mobile phones. The register value is the two's complement, and the LSB equivalent is ’0 00/1 0 * 2 16 = 18 · 16 Hz. The frequency offset is estimated by the controller and the value loaded into the numerically controlled oscillator in the rx data frame. During the initialization, the connection settings and communication mode settings are mainly performed. The values related to the numerically controlled oscillator index are shown in the figure. In the call mode, in order to receive data, the numerically controlled oscillator will recalculate and load it into the modem first. If the offset of index 0 is 0 Hz, then each numerically controlled oscillator index is shown in the figure below: Numerically controlled oscillator index 0 1 -1 2 -2 3 -3 4 -4 Hexadecimal value 0 044D I 7BB3 089A F766 0CE7 F319 1134 EECC 1 If the offset of index 0 is 555H (25K Hz), then the value of each numerical control amplifier index is as shown in the figure below: 1 2 -2 3 -3 4 -4, sixteen il place value 1 0555 05C3 04E7 0631 0479 069F 040B 070D 039D 1 i Η i 1 I 1 1 1 ss Η 1 page 26 475321 5. Description of the invention (24) 4 4.3.2 Noise (PN) generator The ^ _ ^ code used by the noise generator to transmit the 148 blocks in the spread spectrum data machine. There are eight noise generators PNO, PN1, and PN2. ... PN7. Each noise generator consists of two 5-bit registers, R1 and R2, respectively. The hardware wiring position of the R2 register is 11111. The way to load data into the R1 register is to check whether it is an odd communication channel or an even communication channel, as shown in the table below. R1 data of each noise generator PN0 PN1 PN2 PN3 PN4 PN5 PN6 PN7 Odd 00010 00100 00110 10000 10010 10100 10110 11001 Even 00001 00011 01110 10011 10111 11000 11100 11110

4.4.3.3 TX FIFO TX FIFO150可參考資料被傳送出的方式,也就是以四 種模式中的任何一個傳送到遠端手機中。在這裏面總共有 384位元(或48位元組)的資料。資料格式的詳細說明如下 表所示。 TX FIFO資料格式 資料名稱 式,連結設屋模式, 通話模式 刖狡 •唯一的字 ~~^ ^—— 48位元都為〇 sfL #vi^ 呼H/被呼叫的識別竭,F 〜 命令,呼叫設定資料, J / w 一 32位元 ------— ’____ ^OO jiL 7〇 --------------- 嚴 ΖΖΖΖ.,16 256位元 16位it都為14.4.3.3 TX FIFO TX FIFO150 can refer to the way in which the reference data is transmitted, that is, transmitted to the remote handset in any of four modes. There is a total of 384 bits (or 48 bytes) of data in it. The detailed description of the data format is shown in the table below. TX FIFO data format Data name format, linking housing mode, call mode is tricky. The only word ~~ ^ ^ —— 48 bits are all 0sfL # vi ^ Call H / Called are exhausted, F ~ command, Call setting data, J / w-32-bit ------- '____ ^ OO jiL 7〇 --------------- Yan ZZZZ .., 16 256-bit 16-bit it's all 1

475321475321

4· 4. 3. 4 CODEC 輸出 在展佈頻譜數據機中的CODEC介面152,主要是提供在 1 KHz速率時到控制器的中斷。這是具有最高優先權的中 斷。對於每一個中斷,控制器都會送出八位元組c〇dec輸 出責料到CODEC緩衝器。CODEC輸出只有一個内部來源,且 這來源是藉由控制器所產生,像按鍵聲、撥號聲、忙線 等等都是CODEC輸出。 4· 4· 3· 5命令暫存器 命令暫存器154提供以下八位元的命令: 位元0 :無效 位元1 :無效 位疋2 : TDEN :當這位元為高位元時,IPM將會調整編 ,時脈以便使輸入訊號達到最大功率,然後停止於抖開的 操作’也就是說編碼時脈等於系統時脈除以8。當這位元 為低位7L時,抖開功能將不會停止,也就是說編碼時脈等 於系統時脈除以9與7兩者其中之一。系統時脈以 11· 904MHz定義之。而預設的位元值為高位元。 位疋3 : S碼:設定這個位元可迫使IpM延伸它4除頻的 PN,時脈周期(系統時脈是12除頻)。這是常用來作pN碼的 搜尋·。,電源重開後此位元會被設定在0(使無效)。在栽 AFN數字、pn碼、.及NC〇之後,控制器將會重置然後設定 此位疋到初始的搜尋狀態。FN數字及pN碼只會在連結設定 f式的開始載入一次。無論如何,NC〇在每次接收資料以 月1J都需要載入到展佈頻譜數據機。4 · 4. 3. 4 CODEC output The CODEC interface 152 in the spread spectrum modem mainly provides interruption to the controller at the rate of 1 KHz. This is the interrupt with the highest priority. For each interrupt, the controller sends an octet codec output to the CODEC buffer. The CODEC output has only one internal source, and this source is generated by the controller, such as button sounds, dial sounds, busy lines, etc. are all CODEC outputs. 4 · 4 · 3 · 5 Command Register The command register 154 provides the following eight-bit commands: Bit 0: Invalid bit 1: Invalid bit 疋 2: TDEN: When this bit is high, IPM The timing will be adjusted so that the input signal reaches its maximum power, and then it stops at the jittering operation, that is, the encoding clock is equal to the system clock divided by 8. When this bit is low 7L, the shake-out function will not stop, that is, the encoding clock is equal to the system clock divided by 9 and 7. The system clock is defined at 11 · 904MHz. The preset bit value is the high bit. Bit 疋 3: S code: Setting this bit can force IpM to extend its PN divided by 4 and clock period (system clock is divided by 12). This is commonly used for searching pN codes. After the power is turned on, this bit will be set to 0 (disabled). After the AFN number, pn code,. And NC are set, the controller will reset and set this bit to the initial search state. The FN number and pN code will only be loaded once at the beginning of the link setting f. In any case, NC〇 needs to be loaded into the spread spectrum data machine every time the data is received every month.

麵 第28頁 475321 五、發明說明(26) 位元4 ·· UW旁通:設定這位元可旁通特貞 及將所有的接收資料寫入接收FIF〇 ^此位元目^的/貞& 除錯用。預設值是0 (偵測)。 的只是為了 位元5 : TDD一REQ :設定這位元可開始進 請求。在主控終端裝置進入通訊模式後,會在2;:;: 兩者間擇其一。無論如W,受控終端裝置不需巧= 訊模式而設定這一位元,取而代之的是利用第二 有傳送)及第七位元(只有接收)都被重置時,萨由兀= 一字元結果來進行設定。精由偵測早 位元6 :當此位元設定時表示只有在傳送。 位元7 :當此位元設定時表示只有在接收。 在進行連結設定過程中,控制器會根據下表中 的操作模式將表中的命令傳送至數據機。 通訊及呼 設定模 式 通話模式Page 475321 on page 28 5. Description of the invention (26) Bit 4 · UW bypass: Set this element to bypass the special frame and write all the received data into the receiving FIF. & Debugging. The default value is 0 (detected). It is only for bit 5: TDD_REQ: Set this bit to start the request. After the master terminal device enters the communication mode, it will choose between 2;:;:. No matter if it is W, the controlled terminal device does not need to set the bit in a smart mode. Instead, it uses the second transmission) and the seventh bit (only reception) is reset. Character result. Precise detection early Bit 6: When this bit is set, it means that only transmission. Bit 7: When this bit is set, it means only receiving. During the link setting process, the controller will transmit the commands in the table to the modem according to the operation modes in the table below. Communication and call setting mode call mode

初始模式 連結請求 模式 連結設定 模式 4· 4· 4從直接順序式展佈頻譜數據機到控制器的資料 4 · 4 · 4 · 1 功率Initial mode Link request mode Link setting mode

,第29頁, Page 29

五、發明說明(27)V. Description of Invention (27)

Λ位Λ( 7位元組〕的功率資料指示接收訊號的強产 4· 4· 4. 2 AFC識別器 強IThe power data of Λ bit Λ (7 bytes) indicates the strong output of the received signal 4 · 4 · 4.2 AFC identifier Strong I

4· 4. 4· 3 接收FIFO 接收FIF01 56包含從遠端手機的資料接收。 總共有384位元(或48位元組)的資料 有兩種資料搭載的型式。第—種資:二母:式貝二 接收終端,目的是找出通訊資料的起始且 括一前言、特殊字元及一資料柩的地匕们、.且成包 的别—、θ n次Γ 貝枓框的結尾。第二種資料搭載 的^式疋通訊艮料。依照相位及模式的不同,資料可 交握介面資料或數位聲音資料,資料格式規範如下 示04 · 4. 4 · 3 Receive FIFO Receive FIF01 56 contains the data received from the remote handset. There are 384-bit (or 48-byte) data in total. There are two types of data. The first kind of material: two mothers: two receiving terminals, the purpose of which is to find the beginning of communication data and include a preface, special characters and a data shovel, and a package of other --- Γ The end of the frame. The second type of data carries the ^ type communication material. Depending on the phase and mode, the data can be hand-shake interface data or digital audio data. The data format specification is shown below.

表4· 4· 4· 3 接收FIFO 資料名稱 連結请求模式,連結設定模式,通 訊模式 通話模式 前言 ___48位元的〇_ F8CA 6735 He>T,32 位元 ~ 48位元的〇 F8CA 6735 Hex, 32位元 訊息 P叫/被呼叫識別,數值控制振盪 器Fnx,呼叫設定資料,288位元 無 聲音 無 ^ 256位元 資料框的結尾 16位元的〇 16位元的0 4 · 4 · 4 · 4編碼輸入 編碼介面152在特殊積體電路裡將以1 KHz速率(相當於 1微秒)產生對控制器的中斷。這是最高優先權的中斷。在 每個中斷’控制器會在資料儲存之編碼輸aFIF〇及記錄8Table 4 · 4 · 4 · 3 Receive FIFO data name Link request mode, link setting mode, communication mode Call mode Preface ___ 48-bit 〇_ F8CA 6735 He> T, 32-bit to 48-bit 〇F8CA 6735 Hex , 32-bit message P calling / calling identification, numerically controlled oscillator Fnx, call setting data, 288-bit no sound, no ^ 256-bit data frame, end of 16-bit 0-16-bit 0 4 · 4 · 4 · 4 encoding input encoding interface 152 will generate an interrupt to the controller at a rate of 1 KHz (equivalent to 1 microsecond) in a special integrated circuit. This is the highest priority interrupt. After each interrupt, the controller will input aFIF in the data storage code and record 8

第30頁 475321 五、發明說明(28) 位元組之編碼輸出F IF 0處接收編碼的8位元組。 4. 4. 4. 5狀態旗標 位元0 :當追蹤為進行時,此位元會被設定;也就是 所有的FN數字、陶碼、及數值控制振盪器都要符合。 4. 4. 4. 6按鍵解碼器 控制器每20微秒會從按鍵解碼器158讀取3位元組 (1D,1E,及1 F)的輸入資料,每一個位元表示資料的一個 特徵,如下所示。 1 2 3 通話 4 5 6 内線 1: E 7 8 9 重撥 氺 0 # 保留 1 F 記憶 快閃 麥克風 /靜音 益效 無效 無效 益效 #、、、 無效 資料解螞依照慣用的規則規範出本創作所使用的按鍵 型式、 _ 4· 4· 4· 7資料流程 針對撥入及/或撥出電話,基地台對於遙遠的一方與 手機間是扮演著中間人的角色。其中有一組編碼是連結到Page 30 475321 V. Description of the invention (28) The encoding output of the byte FIF 0 receives the encoded 8 byte. 4. 4. 4. 5 Status Flag Bit 0: This bit will be set when tracking is in progress; that is, all FN numbers, ceramic codes, and numerically controlled oscillators must match. 4. 4. 4. 6 button decoder controller will read 3 bytes (1D, 1E, and 1 F) input data from the button decoder 158 every 20 microseconds, each bit represents a characteristic of the data ,As follows. 1 2 3 Call 4 5 6 Extension 1: E 7 8 9 Redial 氺 0 # Reserved 1 F Memory flash microphone / mute beneficial effect invalid no effective effect # ,,, invalid data solution The type of buttons used, _ 4 · 4 · 4 · 7 data flow is for incoming and / or outgoing calls. The base station acts as a middleman between the remote party and the mobile phone. One set of codes is linked to

第31頁 475321 五、發明說明(29) f克風及揚聲器,控制器控制編碼的連結到介面使進行傳 送與振鈴,或疋連結到傳送(Τχ)緩衝記憶體及接收(RXy 緩衝記憶體,或是同時連結到上述二者。 5 · 0系統時序 ”月參考下列的系統時序表及圖8、圖g,以下將作系統 =序的描述。圖8係表示分時雙工結構及主控裝置端的時 ,圖9係表不分時雙工結構及受控裝置端的時序。一此 = SSS9M輸出的數值是作為參考用。真實值較佳的是; :^電波模組的規格實施者。由於手機對於呼 m經像呼叫接收器一樣好,所以這意 匕 ,地台間所對應的系統時序是沒有 ”:不同角色、主控或受控間的相關聯性。通 疋认弋通話初始條件的實體,反之,受 工 【體成稱為"終端"。下列系統時序表所列為各個參的Page 31 475321 V. Description of the invention (29) f grams and speakers, the controller controls the code to connect to the interface to transmit and ring, or link to the transmit (TX) buffer memory and receive (RXy buffer memory, Or connect to both of them at the same time. 5 · 0 System Timing "Refer to the following system timing chart and Fig. 8 and Fig. G. The following will describe the system = sequence. Fig. 8 shows the time division duplex structure and main control. At the device side, Figure 9 shows the time-division duplex structure and the timing of the controlled device side. This = the output value of SSS9M is for reference only. The true value is better;: ^ The implementer of the specifications of the radio module. Because the mobile phone is as good as the call receiver, this means that the system timing between the platforms is not ": the correlation between different roles, masters or controlled. By identifying the initial call The entity of the condition, on the other hand, is subject to "the terminal". The following system timetable is listed for each parameter.

第32頁 475321 五、發明說明(30) 系統時序表 名稱 參數 最大值 位元數目 解調變的基本時序 11.904MHZ 96Kbps (10.4167/zs/bit) TO 資料框長度 4msec 768 T1 傳輸致動打開的時間 1,975/zs T2 傳輸致動關閉的時間 2,02511 s T3 從傳輸致動打開到傳輸 接收模式打開 1 T4 從傳輸資料關閉到傳輸 接收模式打開 1 T5 DC穩定時間 23 T6 從傳輸致動打開到傳輸 資料打開,從傳輸資料 關閉到傳輸致動關閉 1 T7 傳送資料資料框時間 288x10.4167//s 288 T8 從傳輸致動關閉到接收 致動打開 1 T9 從接收致動關閉到傳輸 致動打開 >0//s 1 T10 從接收致動打開到接收 資料打開 Til 從接收資料關閉到接收 致動關閉 1 T12 從接收致動打開到接收 資料直流及增益穩定 <300 β s <24 T13 接收資料資料框時間 288x10.4167//s 288 T14 晶片時序 0.672 β s (l/1488KHz) ·< T15 傳輸穩定 T21 接收致動打開時間 <2,012.5/zs T22 _接收致動關閉時間 ^ 1,987.5/zsPage 32 475321 V. Description of the invention (30) Basic timing of system timing table name parameter Maximum number of bits Demodulation 11.904MHZ 96Kbps (10.4167 / zs / bit) TO Data frame length 4msec 768 T1 Transmission actuation open time 1,975 / zs T2 Transmission actuation off time 2,02511 s T3 From transmission actuation on to transmission reception mode on 1 T4 from transmission data off to transmission reception mode on 1 T5 DC stabilization time 23 T6 from transmission activation on to transmission Data open, from transmitting data closed to transmitting actuating closed 1 T7 transmitting data frame time 288x10.4167 // s 288 T8 from transmitting actuating closing to receiving actuating opening 1 T9 from receiving actuating closing to transmitting actuating open > 0 // s 1 T10 From receiving actuation open to receiving data opening Til From receiving data closing to receiving actuating closing 1 T12 From receiving actuation opening to receiving data DC and gain stabilization < 300 β s < 24 T13 receiving Data frame time 288x10.4167 // s 288 T14 chip timing 0.672 β s (l / 1488KHz) < T15 transmission stable T21 when receiving actuation is turned on ≪ 2,012.5 / zs T22 _ receives an actuator closing time ^ 1,987.5 / zs

HU 第33頁 五、發明說明(31) 5 · 3資料框同步 一般來說,有兩種資料流可藉由受控端來進 多^一#用288位元定長度包方式t ϋ 4 这種圮錄方式常 次資料框及接收端的次資料框。多工記錄的同步方式是萨 由辨認確定的資料樣本以紀錄在所接收的位元流中,比^ 資料樣本與所接收的資料流以達到及 】;::;:!工,起始位元即開始二 p,i由^ φ以單一子兀作為資料樣本,單一字元是否吻合 貝!由J佈頻譜數據機來執行。一旦單一字元被驗證通過 後,緊跟著的資料流就會被移AFIF0中,同時會送出一 斷訊號至控制器以便進行接收資料的多工記錄。曰 式。這種方式需要在 ,記錄:;ΐί =在夕工、連續的分時雙工資料框之信號資料域的連 鎖效應。信號記錄皆會在同步訊號(SYNC—D)及 =終端前加上一資料樣本,控制器的軔體則計算資: 都是可程式的。 ♦ Μ及同步訊號資料樣本 6 ·資料框格式 母一分時雙工資料框負責傳送及接收數位資料。 訊:同#號、信號每種 475321 五、發明說明(32) " --- 二^二在這些資料框裡所承載的資訊都會格式化成分時雙工 包裹,下表及圖1 〇中所顯示的為資料框的格式。每一個資 料框分為二個次資料框,其中一個資料框負責傳送,另一 個資料框負責接收。每個次資料框由一48位元的前言區 塊:I 3f位元特殊字元區塊、一 2 8 8位元資料區塊及一 1 6 位元^ ΐ料框結束區塊所組成。前述資料資料框構將會在 後面說明。分時雙工資料框的總長度是768位元。 資料框格式化表 傳送次資料框 接收次資料框 前言 特殊字 傳送多 傳送次 前言 特殊字 接收多 接收次 元 工記錄 資料框 元 工記錄 資料框 的結束 的結束 1位元 Ϊ 1 32位元 288位元 16位元 48位元 32位元 288位元 16位元 6· 1前言同步 〇。/言同步是一48位元的資料樣本,它的預設值皆為 這個區塊允許接收器去擷取及追蹤頻率偏置與接收訊 琥的特徵時序。 6 · 2特殊字元 人特殊字元區塊在總長度中佔了 3 2位元。該特殊字元包 ^ 預設的資料順序,以便允許接收器進行鎖相位在接收 訊號上的資料框時序。 ,L 3傳送/接收多工記錄 〇 、資料區塊總共是佔了 288位元。前述資料區塊有兩種 里式的資料包裝:信號多工與通話多工。信號多工 S Mux)的資料包裝常允許基地台與手機接收器進行擷取HU Page 33 V. Description of the Invention (31) 5 · 3 Data Frame Synchronization Generally speaking, there are two types of data streams that can be added by the controlled end. ^ # 288-bit fixed-length packet method t 这 4 This This recording method has a secondary data frame and a secondary data frame on the receiving end. The synchronization mode of the multiplexing record is to identify the data sample identified in the received bit stream, and compare the data sample with the received data stream to achieve】; ::;:! Work, the starting bit is the first two p, i from ^ φ with a single sub-frame as a data sample, whether the single character is consistent! Be implemented by the J cloth spectrum data machine. Once a single character is verified, the following data stream will be shifted to AFIF0, and an interrupt signal will be sent to the controller for multiplexing recording of received data. Said. This method needs to be recorded in: ΐί = Interlocking effect in the signal data field of the continuous time division duplex data frame. The signal record will add a data sample in front of the synchronization signal (SYNC-D) and = terminal, and the controller's carcass will calculate the data: both are programmable. ♦ M and synchronous signal data samples 6 · Data frame format The mother one-minute duplex data frame is responsible for transmitting and receiving digital data. News: Same as the # number and signal type 475321 V. Invention Description (32) " --- ^^ 2 The information carried in these data frames will be formatted as a duplex package, as shown in the table below and Figure 10. The format of the data frame is shown. Each data frame is divided into two secondary data frames, one of which is responsible for transmitting and the other is responsible for receiving. Each secondary data frame consists of a 48-bit preamble block: an I 3f-bit special character block, a 288-bit data block, and a 16-bit ^ block end block. The aforementioned data frame will be explained later. The total length of the TDM data frame is 768 bits. Data frame formatting table transmission time data frame reception time data frame preface special word transmission multiple transmission time preface special word reception multi reception time data record frame data frame end of data frame end 1 bit 16-bit 48-bit 32-bit 288-bit 16-bit 6.1 Preface synchronization 0. Synchronization is a 48-bit data sample. Its default value is all. This block allows the receiver to capture and track the frequency offset and the characteristic timing of the received signal. 6 · 2 special characters Human special character blocks occupy 32 bits in the total length. This special character pack ^ presets the data sequence to allow the receiver to phase-lock the data frame timing on the received signal. , L 3 transmit / receive multiplexing record 〇, the data block occupies a total of 288 bits. The aforementioned data blocks have two types of Chinese-style data packaging: signal multiplexing and call multiplexing. (Signal multiplexing S Mux) data packaging often allows base stations and mobile phone receivers to capture

475321 五、發明說明(33) 或重覆擷取傳送的訊號;通話多工(T-Mux)則支援信號資 訊及基地台與手機間、手機與手機間之聲音資料的一般交 換。前述兩種袼式皆支援第一、第二、及第三層國際標準 組織(I SO )協定結構的規範。 6 · 4次資料框的結束 這個區塊一共是16位元,使用上如同傳送次資料框或 接收次資料框的終端器。 6·5信號多工的格式 288位元的信號多工格式是由以下各項所組成:一倒 頻器的8位元種子、一40位元原使用者安全識別碼區塊、 二8位元原使用者的手機辨認區塊、一40位元終端器安全 識別^區塊、一 8位元終端器的手機辨認區塊、一 2 4位元 控制區塊、及一32位元信號區塊。未使用到的128位元則 是保留供未來使用。 8位元 40位元 8位元 8位元 24位元 160位元 32位元 編石馬種子 安全識 別碼辨 認 傳送者 的終端 辨認 接收者 的終端 辨認 控制資料 補充資訊 信號資料 6 · 5 · 1編碼種子 這個區塊是作為倒頻/解倒頻器的基礎。 6 · 5 · 2 ·安全密碼識別碼 識別,而動作也適用於系統的安全 』文王識別碼疋由二進位碼所編碼成丨〇個十 475321 五、發明說明(34) 進位位數所表示。這種方式亦適用在以識別碼控制電話線 的連結與否。任何小於U個十進位數的識別碼設定都可以 被系統所接受。例如,安全密碼識別碼可以是使用者的電 話號碼,也就是說:區域碼(3位數)、公共碼(3位數)、 本地碼(4位數)。無論如何,只能夠有一個安全識別密碼 可以通過整個系統。對於每一個基地台及/或手機,使用 者在第一次使用前都必須程式更改密碼。 6 · 5 · 3傳送者的終端識別碼 / μ這Λ區Λ常用及 成二個十進位位數,其十進位數範圍為〇〇到 *、.、蜢使用者在程式編輯安全識別碼的同時,他 以同時程式編輯此終端識別碼。假如傳送者是一某 =:它的終端識別碼是分配在。omi,否則它應:是:手 6 · 5 · 4接收者的終端識別碼 、、s端識別碼是由二= ί °=;假如接收者是-基地台,那麼它的終端識:為 定是在〇〇到u之間,否則它應該是一手機。、識別碼必 6 · 5 · 5控制 這個區塊用來詳列說明信號訊息 + 塊由-8位元型式的次區塊、一8位元 2 :迷區 所組成。這個區塊能夠依照在主控端裝置475321 V. Description of the invention (33) or repeated acquisition of transmitted signals; T-Mux supports general exchange of signal information and voice data between base stations and mobile phones, and between mobile phones and mobile phones. Both of the aforementioned methods support the specification of the first, second, and third-tier International Standards Organization (I SO) agreement structures. 6 · End of the 4th data frame This block is a total of 16 bits. It is used as a terminal that transmits or receives a secondary data frame. 6.5 signal multiplexing format The 288-bit signal multiplexing format is composed of the following: an 8-bit seed of the scrambler, a 40-bit original user security identifier block, two 8-bit Yuanyuan user's mobile phone identification block, a 40-bit terminal security identification ^ block, an 8-bit terminal mobile identification block, a 24-bit control block, and a 32-bit signal area Piece. The unused 128 bits are reserved for future use. 8-bit, 40-bit, 8-bit, 8-bit, 24-bit, 160-bit, 32-bit coded stone horse seed security identification code to identify the sender's terminal, identify the receiver's terminal identification control information, supplementary information signal material 6 · 5 · 1 This block of coding seeds is used as the basis for the scrambler / descrambler. 6 · 5 · 2 · Security password identification code, and the action is also applicable to the security of the system. "Wang Wang identification code" is encoded by binary code into ten ten 475321 5. Description of the invention (34) The number of carry digits. This method is also suitable for controlling the connection of the telephone line with the identification code. Any identifier setting less than U decimal digits can be accepted by the system. For example, the security code identification code can be the user's phone number, that is: area code (3 digits), public code (3 digits), local code (4 digits). In any case, only one secure identification code can pass through the entire system. For each base station and / or mobile phone, the user must program change the password before using it for the first time. 6 · 5 · 3 The terminal identification code of the sender / μ This Λ area Λ is often used as two decimal digits, and the decimal digits range from 00 to *,., 蜢 The user edits the security identification code in the program. At the same time, he edited the terminal identification code with a simultaneous program. If the sender is XX =: its terminal identification code is assigned at. omi, otherwise it should: yes: hand 6 · 5 · 4 receiver's terminal identification code, s terminal identification code is composed of two = ί ° =; if the receiver is-base station, then its terminal identification: is fixed It is between 〇〇 and u, otherwise it should be a mobile phone. 、 Identification code must be controlled by 6 · 5 · 5 This block is used to elaborate the signal message. The block consists of a sub-block of -8-bit type and an 8-bit 2: puzzle area. This block can be configured on the host device

第37頁 475321 五、發明說明(35) 與受控裝置之間的請求或回應,來決定那一端是需要被連 結管理。下表所列的是各個階層的型式、可擴充合併入新 式電話的特殊功能,及以後可加入的功能。 名稱 區塊值 功能 —— 無操作 00000000, 00000000 無操伟 連結請求 00000001,00000001 產生主控裝置請求雙向的捸姑 連結再次請求 00000010, 00000010 產生主控裝置停止現在的遂結一 設定並再請求另一次連結 連結請求確認 00000011,00000011 產生受控裝置每2微秒一次的 頻率並持續20微秒,以準備 擷取通訊頻道的連結資訊 連結同意 00000110,00000110 產生主控裝置一次決定NCO 值並接收2次成功的連結請 求確認 連結同意確認 00000111,00000111 產生受控裝置依據所接收的連 結同意訊息,準備進行雙向通 訊 連結拒絕 --- 00001010,00001010 產生主控裝置通知連結設定失 敗 j結釋放 00001100,00001100 產生主控裝置釋放雙向遠結 結釋放完成 00001101,00001101 產生手機釋放雙向連結 通話設定 00100000,00100000 產生主控裝置端進行一通話設 定 通話設定請 垄垄認 00100001,00100001 產生受控裝置端回應設定赛果· 通話設定請 處逢認接收 00100011,00100011 i生主控裝置端通知受控裝詈 進行通話 通話進行 00100100, 00100100 產生受控裝置端依照所接收的 通話資訊作一回應 ^ _進行接收 00100101,00100101 產生主控裝置性二確認回應 警戒 00100110, 00100110 產生受控裝置端通知主控襄 置:通話進行已經開始 d戒接收 00100111,00100111 產生i控裝置作 合 00100100,00100100 連合確認 00100101,00100101 声參主控裝置端通知:已提供 通話 ----—---Page 37 475321 V. Description (35) The request or response between the device and the controlled device to determine which end needs to be managed by the connection. The following table lists the types of various levels, special features that can be extended to incorporate new phones, and features that can be added later. Name block value function-no operation 00000000, 00000000 no operation link request 00000001, 00000001 Generate master control device request bidirectional link connection request again 00000010, 00000010 Generate master control device stop current setting and then request another One link connection request confirms 00000011, 00000011 Generates the frequency of the controlled device every 2 microseconds and lasts 20 microseconds in preparation for capturing the link information of the communication channel. The link agrees with 00000110, 00000110 Generates the master device once to determine the NCO value and receives 2 The successful connection request confirms the connection agreement confirmation 00000111, 00000111 The controlled device is prepared to perform a two-way communication connection rejection based on the received connection consent message 00001010,00001010 The generation of the master device notifies the connection setting failure j connection release 00001100,00001100 Generate the master control device to release the two-way remote connection release completion 00001101, 00001101 Generate the mobile phone to release the two-way connection call settings 00100000,00100000 Generate the master control device to perform a call setting Call settings Please confirm 00100001, 00100001 Generate the controlled device Result of the response setting of the terminal · Call settings, please acknowledge and receive 00100011,00100011. The main control device notifies the controlled device to make a call and conduct 00100100, 00100100. The controlled device generates a response based on the received call information ^ _ Receiving 00100101, 00100101 Generate master control device 2 Confirmation response alert 00100110, 00100110 Generate the controlled device side to notify the master control: The call has started d or receive 00100111, 00100111 Generate the i control device to cooperate 00100100, 00100100 Connect confirmation 00100101 , 00100101 Acoustic parameter master control device notification: call has been provided ------------

H/532iH / 532i

6· 5· 6電訊號 這個區塊包含依據國組織之第二及第三 的電這些編碼^ ,始化完成後,才會被基地台與手機忽略。這 j = 枓從第一層到第二或第三層時是接收,從第二層第 到第-層時則是傳送。在初始、連結設定、及通訊::層 時,這個區塊是大到足以保存所有的資訊,在通話模=時 T MUX),這些^吼將會從多個資料框中連鎖起來。 6. 5. 7補充資訊 這個區塊的内容包含了 一些需要詳細說明情況的資 訊。前述資訊可以是電話號碼、帳號、及/或在通話設定 期間的授權號碼、在廣播期間之新的安全識別碼,等等。 6.6通話多工格式(T-Mux) 類似於信號多工的多個格式,通話多工格式總長是 288位元。它由一 256位元的聲音區塊及一32位元的信號區 堍所組成。 通話多工格式的分佈如下表所示。 通話多工(T-Mux)格式 256位元 32位元 聲音 _ 信號 6. 6. 1聲音區塊 這區塊的用途;〇這區 塊的長度是2 5 6位元’且在一秒内有2 5 0個資料框,因此,6.5.6 Telecommunication Signal This block contains the codes of the second and third telecommunications according to the national organization ^. After the initialization is completed, it will be ignored by the base station and the mobile phone. This j = 接收 is received from the first layer to the second or third layer, and transmitted from the second layer to the-layer. In the initial, link settings, and communication :: layer, this block is large enough to hold all the information, and in call mode = T MUX), these ^ roars will be linked from multiple data boxes. 6. 5. 7 Supplementary information The content of this block contains some information that requires detailed explanations. The foregoing information may be a phone number, an account number, and / or an authorized number during a call setup, a new security identification code during a broadcast, and the like. 6.6 Call Multiplex Format (T-Mux) Similar to multiple formats of signal multiplex, the total length of the call multiplex format is 288 bits. It consists of a 256-bit sound block and a 32-bit signal block 堍. The distribution of the call multiplex format is shown in the following table. T-Mux format 256-bit 32-bit sound_Signal 6.6.1 The purpose of this block of sound; 〇The length of this block is 2 56 bits and within one second There are 250 data frames, so

第39頁 475321 五、發明說明(37) 資料傳輪速度為64, 〇〇〇位元/秒或8, 〇〇〇位元组/秒。 6· 6· 2信號區塊 一 這區塊的用途是··以y二層協定$規範來建構控 這些控制字元包括··使用於基地台機間、手機與_ 手安全識別碼,作為第一層協定_之連 為第三層協定之資訊元t 〇由於這個區 ^大小無法容納所有的信號資訊,所以需要利用多個資料 =區塊,再以連鎖的方式來記錄所有的資訊,就像是控 制子元(這部分請參考8.6節)。 7 ·系統操作Page 39 475321 V. Description of the invention (37) The data transfer speed is 64, 000 bits / second or 8, 000 bytes / second. 6. ································································ This signal block is used to construct and control these control characters using the Y-layer two-layer protocol $. These control characters include ... The first layer of agreement_ is the information element of the third layer of agreement t 〇 Because this area ^ size can not accommodate all the signal information, you need to use multiple data = blocks, and then record all information in a chained manner, It is like a control element (refer to Section 8.6 for this part). 7 System operation

後,其它的終端器就合门處缒器的其中一個在初始化通話 機兩者都可以是初始化者初始化者。由於基地台與手 是:在管理基地台盥手機f疋回應者’所以最佳的情況 然’初始化者終端器與“者一樣的作法。當 針對前述目的而將初 ::::間疋不同W。本發明 ,>=)者則心稱義二 關鍵系統之終端器的較^個操作模 五、發明說明(38) ΐίττ;作模式及從一方到另-^ 如-=ΐ;式中,主控裝置會摘測通話請求訊號,假 2=閒置的,則主控裝置會禮取-閒置頻道, 求的訊號給受控裝置。然後受控裝置決定 =頻率偏置(NC0)後準備好自[,在此同時送出連结請求 ,認的,1给主控裝置。基地台可以㈣性地進行此一動 作,但疋手機只能在它被喚醒的狀態才能進行此一 在這個模式中,一般的頻道(FN0)是作為通訊用,如圖13 所示:而使用信號多工的格式是作冑資料的交換用途。 文控裝置無論何時都必須經由搜尋閒置頻道FNx,再 送出連結請求確認的m號給主㈣置,^這些動作後才 能進入f結设:模式。同樣地,主控裝置亦必須完成送出 連結請求的訊心後,才能進入連結設定模式。纟這個模式 中’主ϊίί 2頻率偏置量_,及結束頻道的相關 資料。所有的連結請求確認的訊息後. (迻可耩由檢一移入的訊息計數來判斷),必須蠻換到通訊 模在接收頻ϊΐτ 幸、及連結同忍訊息之德,奋挾姑® a 1 - ~連結同意確認 疋,而 ’這模式的期間為2 〇微秒。 而使用信唬夂的格式是作為資料的交換用途。After that, one of the other terminal devices will close the door and both of them can be initialized by the initializer. Since the base station and the hand are: in the management base station, the mobile phone f 疋 responders', so the best case is that the initializer terminal is the same as the “recipient.” For the foregoing purpose, the initial :::: time is different W. In the present invention, > =), the operation mode of the terminal of the two key systems is justified. V. Description of the invention (38) ΐίττ; Operation mode and from one to the other-^ Such as-= ΐ; During the call, the master control device will pick up the call request signal. False 2 = Idle, the master control device will politely-idle the channel, and the requested signal is sent to the controlled device. Then the controlled device determines the frequency offset (NC0). Ready from [, at the same time send a connection request, acknowledge, 1 to the master control device. The base station can perform this action voluntarily, but the mobile phone can only perform this action when it is awake. In the mode, the general channel (FN0) is used for communication, as shown in Figure 13: and the format using signal multiplexing is used for data exchange. The text control device must search for the idle channel FNx at any time, and then send it out. Link request confirmation of the number m to the master, ^ these actions Only then can you enter the f setting: mode. Similarly, the master control device must also finish sending the link request to enter the link setting mode. In this mode, '主 ϊί 2 frequency offset _, and the end of the channel Relevant data. After all the links request confirmation messages. (Movement can be determined by checking the count of incoming messages.), You must switch to the communication mode to receive the frequency, and the virtue of linking and forbearing messages. ® a 1-~ The link agrees to confirm the 疋, and the duration of this mode is 20 microseconds. The format using the letter 夂 is for data exchange.

第41頁 五、發明說明 主!定為分時雙工诵_ & 控器會進行交換诵赛< 通訊杈式^^ 唬多工的格式而使 後,二控及受控兩端的終端器會變:::經建立 在—通話模”::$為通話棋式。 後^ί通話斷線 回復到初始化模式 ,及又控兩&的終端器 及使用通話多工格式…,系統允許聲音的4 7· 1操作模式的傳送圖示 操作模式傳送的一 應用在盥W ^这明參考圖11所不。這模式可 机 ,在手機與基地台間的 =了 地偵測通始化M式巾基地台^Γϊ^ 行。 /’仁疋手機只有在被喚醒的狀態可以進 進行通話程質上需要與之通訊的個體。當沒有 微秒,卷鈇:呀’手機保持在睡眠模式的最佳時間為100 手機接二W前述最佳時間是可程式化作改變的。假如按了 的任何一鍵’則手機將會被喚醒。 475321 五、發明說明(40) 7· 2連線設定過程 在電源初始化後,無論是基地台或 終端裝置“般都會進入喚醒或是睡 機 期間是依據伯測任一通話請求及/或連線 、醒狀感的 而改變,假如沒有偵測到任何東西,則線考求的時間 眠狀態。睡眠狀態時間可依據需求作程式化改ί,二:: 預設值是100微秒。有式可以中斷喚醒文變曰較佳的 屋^ ,另二^方 ^ 。連線設定過程對兩接+ — 一樣的。在初主都是 終 端 主控裝置的通話 於内線通話及/或對外通話,終端使用者必須订初;化。對 -内線通話,通話==?ίί:通話請求訊號。對於 知,-旦通^奮求訊號被接收一*,主=來件 行連線設定過程,而前述連線設 始進 訊連線。 “控裝置知,及設定雙向通 圖12所描述的是有關主控裝 疗初始化通訊所需要的步驟 ;又f裝置鳊間’進 通訊連線的坪細步驟圖示,則顯 的-成:人 14B中,依據這些相關的詳細 本發月的圖ΠΑ與圖 步驟。 圃不,以下將個別描述每個 第43頁Page 41 5. Description of the invention Lord! Time-sharing duplexing _ & controller will exchange chanting < communication fork type ^^ After multiplexing the format, the terminal of the two control and controlled ends will change ::: —Call mode ":: $ is a call mode. After the call is disconnected, it returns to the initialization mode, and it also controls two & terminals and uses the call multiplex format ... The system allows 4 7 · 1 operation mode for sound. An application of the transmission mode operation mode is shown in Fig. 11. Refer to Figure 11. This mode can be used between the mobile phone and the base station. The ground detection M-type base station ^ Γϊ ^ OK. / 'Ren phone can only communicate with individuals who need to communicate with each other in the awakened state. When there are no microseconds, roll up: Yeah, the best time for the phone to stay in sleep mode is 100. The above-mentioned best time can be programmed to change. If any one of the keys is pressed, the phone will be woken up. 475321 V. Description of the invention (40) 7 · 2 The connection setting process is performed after the power is initialized, regardless of Is the base station or terminal device generally going to wake up or sleep The time is changed according to any call request and / or connection and awake feeling. If nothing is detected, the time required for the line sleep state. Sleep time can be programmed according to your needs. 2: The default value is 100 microseconds. There are formulas that can interrupt the wake-up call to the better house ^, the other two ^^^. The connection setting process is the same for two connections + — the same. In the beginning, the host is the terminal. For the call of the master control device, for internal calls and / or external calls, the end user must subscribe. Right-Intercom call, call ==? Ίί: call request signal. Regarding the knowledge, once the signal is received, the master-receiver performs the connection setting process, and the aforementioned connection starts the incoming connection. "The control device knows and sets the two-way communication. Figure 12 describes the steps required for the initialization communication of the main control device; and the detailed steps of the communication link between the devices and the device, the following shows- In person 14B, according to these related detailed diagrams of this month and the diagram steps. No, each of them will be described individually on page 43.

五、發明說明(41) 頻道 一共有13個頻道,分別是FN0、pNl 個頻道皆可分為兩個群組: 、…、FN12,每一 FN5、FN7 ,9及_ ;偶道例如像FM、、 fn4、觸、m、FN1咖像剛、FN2: 作為一般的_ & f a ate # Χ的使用情況疋專門 7· 2· 1搜尋閒置頻道的連線過程 —=閒置頻道的連線過程只能藉由主控裝置端來執 订,同呤使用共用頻道,FN〇,作為載運裝置。 依據上面圖示,搜尋閒置頻道之連線過程的較佳步驟 如下列所示: 步驟1 ·打開SYNEN ;隨機地選擇一通訊頻道,例如上 面圖示所舉例的是FN4,或是圖1 3中所示的是FN2。 步驟2 :進行程式編輯無線電頻率(RF)合成器,並將 結果經由輸出阜ΡΟΟ、Ρ(Π及?02送至某一頻道FN#,假如總 搜尋頻道數目大於1 2,則進行步驟8。 步驟3 :載入雜訊(PN)碼(根據是偶頻道或是奇頻道) 到直接順序式展佈頻譜(DSSS)數據機中。 步驟4 :等待2微秒以提供合成器進行鎖相,然後送出 '只★接收"(RX-Only)的命令("只有傳送’,關閉,"只有接 收"打開,"分時雙工”關閉)到數據機中。 步驟5 :載入頻率偏置值至指標順序:〇,+1,_1, + 2 ’ - 2 ’+3 ’-3,+4及-4,如上圖中所示。假如在這頻道V. Description of the invention (41) There are 13 channels in total, which are FN0 and pNl. The channels can be divided into two groups:, ..., FN12, each FN5, FN7, 9 and _; even channels such as FM ,, Fn4, touch, m, FN1 coffee like, FN2: as a general _ & fa ate # Χ usage conditions 疋 special 7. 2 · 1 search for idle channel connection process — = idle channel connection process It can only be ordered by the master device, and the same channel uses the shared channel, FN0, as the carrier device. According to the figure above, the best steps for searching the connection process of idle channels are as follows: Step 1 Open SYNEN; randomly select a communication channel, such as FN4 shown in the figure above, or Figure 13 Shown is FN2. Step 2: Program the radio frequency (RF) synthesizer and send the results to a certain channel FN # via the outputs P0, P (Π, and? 02). If the total number of search channels is greater than 12, go to step 8. Step 3: Load the noise (PN) code (depending on whether it is an even channel or an odd channel) into a direct sequential spread spectrum (DSSS) modem. Step 4: Wait 2 microseconds to provide a synthesizer for phase locking. Then send the command of "Receive only" (RX-Only) (" Only transmit ", close, " Only receive " open, " time-sharing duplex " off) to the modem. Step 5: Load Enter the frequency offset value to the index sequence: 0, +1, _1, + 2 '-2' +3 '-3, +4 and -4, as shown in the figure above. If on this channel

第44頁 五、發明說明(42) :率偏置指標都被檢查過且追蹤位元是關π的 况,則這個頻道可以考 :位凡疋關閉的情 # ^否則’使用下徊相^ i 4後進行第9 步驟6. Λ。 頻率偏置量繼續進行檢杳。 =驟6 .重置s碼且設 饱查 在這2秒期間:;:=?,讀取追縱位元 示此頻道正被使用著追?二在狀態位置被谓_ ^ 頻道。假如= ::=2步驟2,同時嘗試下-個 查下-個頻率偏置量Γ Μ ’則進入步驟5,同時檢 忙線"^聲驟8 .所有的連線都是忙線中,則送出擁擠訊息或" 方彳:Γ9 .發現有閒置頻道可以連線。使用步驟2到7的 :式檢查,用頻道剛的狀態。假如_是閒置狀態,使用 卽中所描述的步驟,進行初始化連線請求的過 程,否則開始進行隨機的時間結束及等待另一次的嘗試。 7· 2· 2連線請求過程 在這過程中,主控裝置端會送一連線請求訊息到受控 、置、。此連線睛求訊息會以每2微秒一次的頻率,經由 用頻道F N 0送出,並以這樣的順序持續丨4 〇微秒鐘。 主控裝置端 , 步驟1 ‘·進行程式編輯無線電頻率合成器,並將結果 經由輸出阜P00、P01及P02送至頻道FN0。 ° 步驟2 ·載入雜訊碼(偶頻道)到特殊用途積體電路 中(ASIC)。 475321 五、發明說明(43) " ---- 步驟3 :載入指標0的頻率偏置值。 步驟4 :等待2微秒·以提供合成器進行鎖相。 步驟5 :載入連線請求訊息到傳送jrIF0 ,送出,,只有 送"(TX-Only)的命令(:,只有傳送”打開,"只有接收,,關 閉,”分時雙工"關閉)到數據機中,然後開始連線請求計 時’例如1 4 0微秒。數據機會以每2微秒的頻率傳送出連線 請求訊息。 ' 步驟6 :假如140微秒計時器已經屆滿,則轉換到連 設定模式。 、 " 受控裝置端 檢查任一色它I連線諳^息。在 這過程期間,停止的終端器會使用不同的頻率偏置指標來 找,頻率偏置量。受 線^決定j頻^是正確的。在受 控裝置端被喚醒的期間,必須針對連線請求訊息以聽命於 共用頻道,並依照下列過程來進行,其較佳實施例之進行 時間至少為2 〇微秒。 步驟1 :進行程式編輯無線電頻率合成器,並將結果 經由輸出阜POO、P01及P02送至頻道FN0。 , 步驟2 ·載入雜訊碼(偶頻道)到數據機中。 ,口步驟3 :等待2微秒以提供合成器進行鎖相,然,,後送出 1有接收"(RX-Only)的命令("只有傳送”關閉,"只有接 收”打開,”分時雙工,,關閉)到數據機中。5. Description of the invention on page 44 (42): If the rate offset index has been checked and the tracking bit is off, then this channel can be considered: Weifan 疋 closed situation # ^ Otherwise 'Use the next phase ^ After i 4, proceed to step 9. 6. Λ. The frequency offset is continuously checked. = Step 6. Reset the s code and set the full check. During this 2 second period:; ==, read the tracking bit to indicate that this channel is being used for tracking? The second in the status position is called the _ ^ channel. If = :: = 2 step 2 and try next-check next-frequency offset Γ Μ 'then go to step 5 and check the busy line at the same time ^ sound step 8. All the lines are busy , Then send a crowded message or " Fang Yi: Γ9. I found an idle channel to connect. Use the: type check from steps 2 to 7 to use the channel just status. If _ is in an idle state, use the steps described in 卽 to initiate the connection request process. Otherwise, start random end of time and wait for another attempt. 7.2.2 Connection request process In this process, the master device sends a connection request message to the controlled device. This connection request message will be sent at a frequency of 2 microseconds via the channel F N 0 and will continue in this order for 4 microseconds. On the master device side, step 1 ‘· Perform a program editing radio frequency synthesizer, and send the results to the channel FN0 via the outputs P00, P01 and P02. ° Step 2 · Load the noise code (even channel) into the special-purpose integrated circuit (ASIC). 475321 V. Description of the invention (43) " ---- Step 3: Load the frequency offset value of index 0. Step 4: Wait 2 microseconds to provide the synthesizer for phase locking. Step 5: Load the connection request message to send jrIF0, send it, and only send the "(TX-Only)" command (:, only send "open," only receive, "close," "time division duplex" Off) into the modem, and then start the connection request timing 'e.g. 140 microseconds. The data device sends out a connection request message every 2 microseconds. 'Step 6: If the 140 microsecond timer has expired, switch to continuous setting mode. &Quot; Controlled device side Check if any color is connected. During this process, the stopped terminator will use different frequency offset indicators to find the frequency offset. The line ^ determines the j frequency ^ is correct. During the period when the controlled device is awakened, it is necessary to respond to the connection request message to the shared channel and perform the following process. The preferred embodiment has a duration of at least 20 microseconds. Step 1: Program the radio frequency synthesizer and send the results to the channel FN0 via the outputs POO, P01 and P02. , Step 2 · Load the noise code (even channel) into the modem. Step 3: Wait for 2 microseconds to provide the synthesizer for phase locking. However, after sending 1 there is a receive command (RX-Only) (" Only transmit " close, " Only receive " open, Time division duplex, off) into the modem.

五、發明說明(44) + 1 ,-1 步驟4 :載入頻率偏置值至指標順序 + 2 **2 ’+3 ’ -3,+4 及-4 、步驟5 :假如發生接收(RX)中斷,這表示一歧訊氣 =:3收t ’則所有的識別碼都必須一 一核對,以°確定此 Ξ = 正確地位址到此受控裝置端,且這個命令應 二二如:述情況都是吻合的,則進行第7步 果。ί 使用至多2微秒的時間讀取追蹤位元的狀態結 則裊-5 ::期間’假如追蹤位元不是在開啟的狀態, = 接收’必須進入第4步驟且嘗試下-個 200臺# 元成一次追蹤位元狀態偵測的時間不超過 作Α 便開始另一個2微秒的計時,而前述之計時是 元⑽的存在與否。假如在這時間内還沒 至,丨絲破^ — 個頻率偏置值。假如在這期間有偵測 中斷的ί =你則啟動另一個2微秒的計時器以便偵測接收 在被接I中如發生接收(Rx)中斷,這表示資料正 ^ ^ ^ 斤有的識別碼都必須---核對,以確定此 該是遠^ ΐ正確地位址到此受控裝置端,且這個命令應 驟,否刖:。假如前述情況都是吻合的,則進行第7步 Γ丄/4步驟且嘗試下-個頻率偏置值。· ("只有值、、,"的話,則运出"只有傳送"(TX-Only)的命令 达丁開’”只有接收”關閉,"分時雙工”關閉)V. Description of the invention (44) + 1, -1 Step 4: Load the frequency offset value into the index sequence + 2 ** 2 '+3' -3, +4 and -4, Step 5: If reception occurs (RX ) Interrupted, which means that a disambiguation gas =: 3 received t 'then all identification codes must be checked one by one to determine this ° = the correct status address to this controlled device, and this command should be two or two such as: If the above conditions are consistent, go to step 7. ί Use up to 2 microseconds to read the status of the tracking bit 袅 -5 :: period 'If the tracking bit is not on, = Receive' must enter step 4 and try the next-200 units # Yuan Cheng's time for tracking bit status detection is no longer than Α and another two microseconds are started. The aforementioned timing is the presence or absence of Yuan Zhen. If it does not arrive within this time, the wire breaks ^ — a frequency offset value. If there is a detection interrupt during this period, you will start another 2 microsecond timer to detect the reception. If a reception (Rx) interrupt occurs in the received I, this indicates that the data is positively identified. ^ ^ ^ The codes must be checked --- to determine whether this is the correct remote address to the controlled device, and the command should go, no:. If the foregoing conditions are consistent, then proceed to step 7 Γ4 / 4 and try the next frequency offset value. · (&Quot; If there is only value ,,, ", it will be shipped out " Only transmit " (TX-Only) command

第47頁 475321 五、發明說明(45) ~ ---- 到數據機中’然後開始連線設定過程。假如追蹤位元在 時器已經計數完畢後,仍然沒有變換成關閉狀態,則 步驟8。 步驟8 :設定錯誤旗標並返回。 7. 2. 3連線設定過程 連線設定過程,使裝 端、兩者才會正好在所找到 描述連線設定的過^~^ 、 主控裝置端 步驟1 ·進行程式編輯無線電頻率合成器,並將結果 經由輸出阜P 0 0、P 0 1及P 0 2送至所找到的閒置頻道。 步驟2 :載A雜訊碼(依據所找_的頻道是偶頻道 奇頻道)到數據機中。 ,步驟3 :等待2微秒以提供合成器進行鎖相,然後送出 只有接收”(RX-Only)的命令("只有傳送,,關閉,,,只有接 收”打開,”分時雙工"關閉)到數據機中。 步驟4 :載入頻率偏置值至指標順序:〇,+ι,-i, + 2 ’ -2 ’ +3,-3,+4 及-4 〇 步驟5 :假如發生接收(RX)中斷,這表示一些訊息正 接收中,貝,】所有的識別碼都必須一 一核對,以確定此 息是正確地位址到此主控裝置端,且這個命令應 /疋連線睛求確認。假如前述情&都是吻合的,則進行 7步驟,否則繼續第6步驟。Page 47 475321 V. Description of the invention (45) ~ ---- Go to the modem 'and start the connection setting process. If the tracking bit has not been turned off after the timer has finished counting, step 8. Step 8: Set the error flag and return. 7. 2. 3 Connection setting process Connection setting process, so that the installation end and the two will be found exactly as described in the connection settings. ^ ~ ^ Step 1 of the master control device · Program editing radio frequency synthesizer , And send the results to the found idle channels via the outputs P 0 0, P 0 1 and P 0 2. Step 2: Load the A noise code (according to the channel you are looking for is an even channel and an odd channel) to the modem. Step 3: Wait for 2 microseconds to provide the synthesizer for phase locking, and then send the command of "Receive Only" (RX-Only) (" Only transmit, close ,, and only receive "open," TDM " Close) to the modem. Step 4: Load the frequency offset value into the index sequence: 〇, + ι, -i, + 2 '-2' +3, -3, +4 and -4 〇 Step 5: If a receive (RX) interrupt occurs, it means that some messages are being received, and all the identification codes must be checked one by one to make sure that the information is the correct address to the host device, and this command should / 疋Connect with your eyes for confirmation. If the aforementioned conditions & are consistent, go to step 7, otherwise continue to step 6.

321 五、發明說明(46) 步驟6 :使用至多2微秒的時間讀取追蹤位元的狀態社 果。在這2微秒期間’假如追蹤位元不是在開啟的狀態— 則表示沒有資料被接收,必須進入第4步驟且嘗試二 =率^置值。完成一次追蹤位元狀態偵測的時間不超過 ΓΛ秒,以便開始另一個2微秒的計時,而前述之計時是 2為偵測特殊字元(Uff)的存在與否。假如在計時琴計數* 畢後還沒有偵測到特殊字元,則進入第4步驟同時嘗試疋 :個頻率偏置值。假如在這期間有偵測到特殊字元,啟 動另一個2微秒的計時器以便偵測接收中斷的存在盥 假如發生接收(RX)中斷’這表示資料正 由、 :的識別碼都必須一 一核對,以確定此接收的訊息是正: 句、Ϊϋί主控裝置端’且這個命令應該是連線請求確 又如刖述情況都是吻合的,則進行第7步驟,否 入第4步驟且嘗試下一個頻率偏置值。 進 (二有傳运"關閉,"只有接收"關閉,"分時雙工,,和⑴ 二然後開始連線通訊過程。假如連線二) Ϊ8十時器已經計數完畢後,仍然沒有被接收到,則進行; 步驟8 :設定錯誤旗標並返回。 受控裝置端 一 步驟1 :進行程式編輯無線 經由輸出阜POO、Ρ01及Ρ02送至 步驟2 ··載入雜訊碼(依據 電頻率合成器,並將結果 所找到閒置的普通頻道。 所找到的頻道是偶頻道或321 V. Description of the invention (46) Step 6: Read the status and social status of the tracking bit using at most 2 microseconds. During these 2 microseconds, 'if the tracking bit is not on — it means that no data was received, you must go to step 4 and try 2 = rate ^ set value. The time to complete the tracking bit state detection should not exceed ΓΛ seconds, in order to start another 2 microsecond timing, and the aforementioned timing is 2 to detect the presence or absence of a special character (Uff). If no special characters have been detected after the chronograph count *, go to step 4 and try 疋: frequency offset values at the same time. If a special character is detected during this period, start another 2 microsecond timer to detect the presence of a reception interruption. If a reception (RX) interruption occurs, this indicates that the data is being sent, and the identification code must be A check to make sure that the received message is positive: sentence, “ΪϋMaster control device side” and this command should be a connection request. If the stated conditions are consistent, go to step 7, if not enter step 4 and Try the next frequency offset value. Incoming (there is transportation " closed, " only receive " closed, " time-sharing duplex, " and then ⑴ 二 and then start the connection communication process. If the connection 2) Ϊ8 timer has been counted, Still not received, then proceed; Step 8: Set the error flag and return. Step 1 of the controlled device: Edit the program wirelessly and send it to Step 2 via the output POO, P01 and P02. Load the noise code (according to the electric frequency synthesizer, and find the idle common channel. The found Is an even channel or

475321 五、發明說明(47) 是奇頻道)到數據機中。 步驟3 :等待2微秒以提供合成器進行鎖相。 步驟4 ·載入'’只有傳送"(τχ — 〇niy)的命令(,,只有傳送 "打開,”只有接收,,關閉,”分時雙工”關閉)到數據機 中’然後持續2 0微秒鐘送出連線請求確認的訊息到主控裝 置端,數據機會以每2微秒鐘一次的頻率送出連線請求確 認的訊息。 步驟5 :當計時器已經計數完2〇微秒時,送出,,初始化 的命令(”只有傳送”關閉,,,只有接收”關閉,"分時°雙 工關閉)到數據機中,然後開始進行連線通訊過程。 7· 2· 4連線通訊過程 連線通訊過程的目的是: 端兩者的通訊連結是正好在所 全成功後,則開始進行通話設 中,主控裝置端是在分時雙工 會送出一連線同意訊息到受控 端可能會送出連線同意確認的 前述的連線同意訊息,則將會 到主控裝置端。當進行過三次 才算完成。有關此連線通訊過 14 A及14 B的流程圖所示,這些 實施例中,對於初始化、處理 的步驟。洋細的步驟如下所述 主控裝置端 確保主控裝置端與受控裝置 找到的頻道上。當這過程完 疋過程。在連線通訊過程 的模式裡,此時主控裝置端 裝置端,同時預期受控裝置 訊息。假如受控裝置端收到 送出連線同意確認的訊息回 交握過程後,連線通訊過程 程的較詳細步驟,如圖14、 圖會一起顯示本發明之最佳 及完成一次通訊連線所需要475321 V. Invention description (47) is an odd channel) into the modem. Step 3: Wait 2 microseconds to provide the synthesizer for phase locking. Step 4 · Load "Only transmit" (τχ — 〇niy) command (,, only transmit " open, "only receive ,, close," time division duplex "off) to the modem 'and then continue The connection request confirmation message is sent to the host device at 20 microseconds, and the data device sends the connection request confirmation message at a frequency of 2 microseconds. Step 5: When the timer has finished counting 20 microseconds At the same time, send out, initialize the command ("Only transmit" is closed, and only "Receive" is closed, "time sharing ° duplex is closed) to the modem, and then start the communication process. 7 · 2 · 4 connection communication process The purpose of the connection communication process is: The communication connection between the two ends is just after all the successes, then the call setup is started, and the main control device end sends a The connection consent message to the controlled end may send a connection consent confirmation to the aforementioned connection consent message, which will go to the master device side. It is considered complete when it has been done three times. As shown in the flowcharts related to this connection communication 14 A and 14 B, in these embodiments, the steps for initialization and processing. The detailed steps are as follows: Master device side Make sure that the master device side and the controlled device find the channel. When the process is complete. In the connection communication process mode, at this time, the master device side and the device side expect the message of the controlled device. If the controlled device end receives the message that sends the connection agreement confirmation and returns to the handshake process, the more detailed steps of the connection communication process are shown in Figure 14. The figure together shows the best of the present invention and the completion of a communication connection. need

475321 五、發明說明(48) 步驟1 :啟動一計時器 步驟2 :送出連線同意訊號給受控裝置端,同時 受控裝置端回應一連線同意確認訊號。假如計時器已經 數完畢,則進行步驟5。 、 步驟計數所接收到的連線同意確認訊號的數目, 假如這計算數目等於3,則進行步驟4 ,否則進行步驟2。 步驟4 :假如連線已經建立成功,設定成功旗標並返 回0 步驟5·連線建立失敗,設定錯誤旗標並返回。 受控裝置端 步驟1 :啟動一計時器。475321 V. Description of the invention (48) Step 1: Start a timer Step 2: Send a connection consent signal to the controlled device, and at the same time, the controlled device responds with a connection consent confirmation signal. If the timer has finished counting, go to step 5. Steps are to count the number of connection agreement confirmation signals received. If the calculated number is equal to 3, go to step 4, otherwise go to step 2. Step 4: If the connection has been established successfully, set the success flag and return to 0. Step 5 · Connection establishment failed, set the error flag and return. Controlled device side Step 1: Start a timer.

步驟2 :等待接收連線同意訊號。假如計時器 數完畢,則進行步驟5。 aT 步驟3 :在接收上述之連線同意訊號後,送出一 同意確認訊號回給主控裝置端。計數所送出的連線责 認訊號的數目,假如這計算數目等於3, 心 則進行步驟2。 适仃乂驟4,否 回。步驟4 :假如連線已經建立成功,設定成功旗標並返 步驟5 :連線建立失敗,設定錯誤旗標並返 ,7 · 4連線管理狀態 理ΛΑ主要是因為國 在連線設定、連線監控,及連線釋放的項 ,+ Μ 于機與基Step 2: Wait for the connection consent signal. If the timer is over, go to step 5. aT Step 3: After receiving the above-mentioned connection consent signal, send a consent confirmation signal back to the main control device. Count the number of connection responsibility signals sent out. If the calculated number is equal to 3, go to step 2. Appropriate step 4, no back. Step 4: If the connection has been established successfully, set the success flag and return to Step 5: Connection establishment failed, set the error flag and return, 7.4 The connection management status is mainly due to the country setting the connection, Line monitoring and connection release items, + Μ on the machine and the base

第51頁 475321 五、發明說明(49) 地台的運作是相同的,因此,雖 存在,但是基地台與手機的連線管仍有一些變化 L。:無效的狀態 “理狀態是相同的。 假如基地台或手機在沒有通話存在 留在此狀態。在這個狀態中,假如 二况下丨疋伶 的通話事件發生,例如像拿起話; '述::體横測到任何 :進入到初始化狀態";假如 =的訊息’貝IJ管理狀態會變成受控裝置端管S,而且 進入到’’初始化狀態,丨。 w L1 ··初始化狀態 在這個狀態中,假如共用頻道是閒置的,主控 會搜尋一個閒置的頻道(FNx)。假如找到一個閒置的、 道,則主控裝置端會送出時間長達丨2〇微秒之多個" 求"的訊息到受控裝置,並直到主控裝置端收到來自成月 ,裝置端所回應的”連線請求確認”訊息為止,然後會二 連線設定狀態Π。假如主控裝置端在丨〇 〇微秒内一直 ^到 ,有收到f’連線請求確認”的訊息,則主控裝置端將會 α 連線重請求"的訊息給受控裝置,同時重複進行前述、馬 程。假如連線請求過程失敗三次,則使用者會收到2 3、 忙線訊號,並且返回至”無效的·狀態"。 土或Page 51 475321 V. Description of the invention (49) The operation of the base station is the same. Therefore, although it exists, there are still some changes in the connection between the base station and the mobile phone. : Invalid state "The state is the same. If the base station or mobile phone is left in this state when there is no call. In this state, if the call event occurs in the second case, such as picking up the words; ::: Anything detected by the body: Entering the initialization state " If the message of = 'Beijing IJ management state will become the controlled device end pipe S, and enter the `` initialization state, 丨. W L1 ·· Initialization state is In this state, if the shared channel is idle, the master will search for an idle channel (FNx). If an idle channel is found, the master device will send a number of times as long as 20 microseconds " Request the message to the controlled device, and until the master device receives the "connection request confirmation" message from Chengyue and the device, then it will set the connection status Π. If the master device The terminal has been in 丨 〇00 microseconds until a message of "f 'connection request confirmation" is received, then the master control device will send the message of α connection re-request "to the controlled device, and repeat the above. ,horse . If the connection request process fails three times, the user will receive 2 3, the busy signal, and return to the "invalid state".

fl 另一方面,受控裝置會藉由變換頻率偏置指標來 Afl On the other hand, the controlled device changes the frequency offset index to A by

連線凊求的§fL息。假如在某一個確定的頻率偏置於 G 上,受控裝置至少收到三次正確的,,連線請求”訊息f π 〜’則此 475321 五、發明說明(50) 相關的數值控制振盪器值將是所需的頻率偏置。此時,受 控裝置會送出一 ”連線請求確認”的訊息給主控裝置端,並 且將自己轉入”連線設定狀態",否則沒有送出任何訊息 時,受控裝置會轉入π無效的狀態π 。 :連線設定狀態 在這個狀態,主控裝置鎖定已被搜尋到的閒置通訊頻 道,並且釋放連線共用頻道。此時,主控裝置被設定在持 續20微秒的"只有接收”的模式,同時使用不同的頻率偏置 值來驗證所接收的’’連線請求確認"的訊息。假如主控裝置 至少收到三次正確的”連線請求確認"訊息,這表示已決定 了數值控制振盈器值(頻率偏置),然後,在前述2 〇微秒 結束之時,主控裝置會用所有相關的頻道訊息,送出一,, 連線同意π的訊息給受控裝置。當主控裝置由受控裝置處 接收一次π連線同意確認"的訊息後,主控裝置會轉換成,, 通訊狀態”並開始雙向通訊。假如在1 0 0微秒鐘内,主控襄 置沒有再次收到”連線同意確認"的訊息,主控震置將會送 出一"連線重請求π的訊息給受控裝置,同時返回到,,初始、 化狀態ff並重新進行設定過程。假如連線設定過程失敗三 次’則使用者會收到擁塞或忙線訊號,並且改變狀態至,, 無效的狀態"。 ; 同樣地,受控裝置會持續用2 0微秒送出”連線請求_確 認’1的訊息給主控裝置,並且等待"連線同意”的訊息。假 如接收到前述之"連線同意,,的訊息,受控裝置會利用所接 收的頻道資訊來更新自己。受控裝置在接收所有的通訊連Connect to the requested §fL information. If at a certain frequency offset on G, the controlled device receives at least three correct, connection request "message f π ~ ', then this 475321 V. Description of the invention (50) Related numerical control oscillator value Will be the required frequency offset. At this time, the controlled device will send a "connection request confirmation" message to the master control device, and will transfer itself to "connection setting status", otherwise no message will be sent At this time, the controlled device will enter the state π invalid. : Connection setting state In this state, the main control device locks the idle communication channel that has been searched, and releases the connection sharing channel. At this time, the master device is set to a "only receive" mode that lasts 20 microseconds, and uses different frequency offset values to verify the received "connection request confirmation" message. If the master device Received at least three correct "connection request confirmation" messages, which indicates that the numerical control oscillator value (frequency offset) has been determined. Then, at the end of the aforementioned 20 microseconds, the master device will use all Send a related channel message, and connect the message that agrees with π to the controlled device. When the main control device receives the message of π connection consent confirmation "from the controlled device, the main control device will change to," Communication status "and start two-way communication. If within 100 microseconds, the main control device Xiangzhi did not receive the message of "Confirmation of connection consent" again, the master control device will send a "connection re-request message" to the controlled device, and return to the initial, state ff, and restart again. Go through the setup process. If the connection setting process fails three times ’, the user will receive a congestion or busy signal and change the status to,“ Invalid status ”. ; Similarly, the controlled device will continuously send a "connection request_acknowledgement" 1 message to the master device in 20 microseconds, and wait for the "connection consent" message. If the above-mentioned "connection consent" is received, the controlled device will use the received channel information to update itself. The controlled device is receiving all communication connections

五、發明說明(51) 綠資訊一次後,便會送出一"連線同意確認’’的訊息給主控 裝置,同時轉換至π通訊狀態”並準備好進行雙向通訊。 在這實施例中,假如受控裝置持續丨〇〇微秒鐘都沒有一"連 綠同意,,的訊息,則受控裝置將會返回到”無效的狀態,,。 L3 :通訊狀態 在這個狀態中,主控裝置與受控裝置兩者的通訊是經 由通訊頻道,其交換聲音的記錄像是連續性地信號記錄一 樣清楚。無論何時,只要主控裝置與受控裝置兩者之一偵 謂到掛斷電話的事件發生,則通話情況就會被斷線。在通 話斷線後,主控裝置會送出一,,連線釋放,,的訊息給受控裝 置’同時轉換自己至”連線釋放狀態”。 另一方面,受控裝置在收到”連線釋放"的訊息後,將 會轉換到π連線釋放狀態”。 L4 :連線釋放狀態 在這個狀態,主控裝置會重置它的連線資料庫,同時 等待來自受控裝置的’’連線釋放完成”的訊息。在接收到來 自受控裝置的”連線釋放完成”的訊息後,主控裝置釋放出 通訊頻道並轉換到,,初始化狀態"。 另一方面,受控裝置在初始化它的連線資料庫後,會 送出一π連線釋放完成"的訊息給主控裝置並且轉換至"初 蟑化狀態"。 4 L5 :連線恢復狀態 無論在什麼時候’假如主控裝置或是受控裝置兩者之 一在識別碼交握過程中失敗(可參看8· 3節),前述兩者之V. Description of the invention (51) After the green information is sent once, a "connection agreement confirmation" message will be sent to the master control device, and it will be switched to the π communication state at the same time, and ready for two-way communication. In this embodiment If the controlled device does not have a “Lian Lian Agree” message for a duration of 丨 00 microseconds, the controlled device will return to the “invalid state”. L3: Communication status In this state, the communication between the main control device and the controlled device is via the communication channel, and the recording of the exchanged sound is as clear as the continuous signal recording. Whenever one of the master device and the controlled device detects that the call is dropped, the call is disconnected. After the call is disconnected, the main control device will send a message, "connection released," to the controlled device 'while switching itself to the "connection release state". On the other hand, after receiving the message of "connection release", the controlled device will switch to the π connection release state. L4: Connection release status In this state, the master control device resets its connection database and waits for a "connection release complete" message from the controlled device. Upon receiving the "connection release" from the controlled device After the line release is complete, the master control device releases the communication channel and switches to, and initializes the state. On the other hand, after the controlled device initializes its connection database, it will send a π connection release complete " message to the master control device and switch to " initialization status " 4 L5: connection recovery status no matter when 'if one of the master control device or the controlled device is in the hands of the identification code Failure during the process (see section 8.3), either

第54頁 475321Page 54 475321

一便會送出’’識別碼遺失”的訊息到另外一端,同時會轉換 成連線恢復狀態。上述後者終端在接收到"識別碼遺失"的 訊息後,也會轉換成連線恢復狀態。在這個狀態中,主控 裝置會藉由重新初始化識別碼交握的過程,來嘗試同步連 線。在計時器計數終止前(失去連線,5秒鐘),假如主控 裝置已經收到一個有效的安全識別碼時,則將返回到前一 狀態,並且重置所有的計時器,否則,主控裝置會轉換回 •初始化狀態"去重新建立通訊連線。 7· 5通話事件 §正在進行通話時,基地台與手機兩者都是停留在已 確認的通話進行狀態。通話進行狀態是一個在任何時候, 通話都會停留在一穩定情況的狀態。無論何時,假如一個 或多,通話事件發生衝突時,這衝突通話事件會轉變到其 他狀態。通話進行軟體是依據所有可能之通話事件的狀^ 轉變,進行編碼’以下所列較通話事件說明,這些清以 町進行擴展’以容納新的特徵或是功能。 彳 1 ·通話來源··手機識別碼 2 · 專待通話聲The message "Identity Code Lost" will be sent to the other end as soon as it is switched to the connection restoration state. After receiving the message of "Identification Code Lost", the latter terminal will also be converted to the connection restoration state. In this state, the master device will try to synchronize the connection by re-initializing the ID code handshake process. Before the timer count expires (lost the connection, 5 seconds), if the master device has received A valid security ID will return to the previous state and reset all timers, otherwise, the master device will switch back to the “initialized state” to re-establish the communication connection. 7.5 Call event§ When a call is in progress, both the base station and the mobile phone stay in the confirmed call progress state. The call progress state is a state where the call stays in a stable condition at any time. Whenever, if one or more, the call is in progress When an event conflicts, the conflicting call event will change to other states. The call progress software is based on the status of all possible call events ^ Encoding 'listed below described more call event, to clear the extended cho' to accommodate the new features or functionality. 1 left foot · ·· phone call source identification code designed to be 2 · call sound

3.撥號位數:數字接著數字,儲存並前進,記 單按鍵,重撥 4·保留:保留請求保留接受,保留拒絕 5·保留恢復:保留恢復接受,保留恢復拒絕 6·内線對講或是頁模式:手機識別碼 7.回答3. Dialing digits: digits followed by digits, store and forward, record a single button, and redial 4 · Reservation: reserve request reserve acceptance, reserve rejection 5 · reserve resume: reserve resume acceptance, reserve resume rejection 6 · intercom or Page Mode: Mobile ID 7. Answer

第55頁 475321 五、發明說明(53) ^通話暫停:本地,遠端 .通話暫停取消:本地,、土山 10. 通話轉接:基地台斑= 進或由内撥出的通話至另_;、于機兩者都可以轉接由外打 進行穿越現在的談話路徑的2端機。在基地台上,這會 11. 等待交換 勒作 取消,拒絕 駐紮:接受掛斷電話 13. 打電話回應 旱起話湾 14. 喚醒:註冊,接受拒絕 7· 6通話過程狀態 节時通= 是進行—次通話的穩定狀態。當進行通 地“舍右一::: 確定的通話過程狀態。在基 a ;,在…丨連、,。到公共交換式電話網路的線路,也就 ΪΪ端以建立-話線通路。同樣地,: 手機此建立-條話線通路(頻道)。換句話說 = 時=裡手機只能與-實質體進行通訊對話,該實質二 是或是另-個手機此,相同之通話過程:離的 基地台及手機兩者。當沒有任何』 進仃寺,通話狀態會被初始化至閒置狀態,當 到碟定的通話事件後,通話狀態便會轉 ;^ 举狀態。通話過程之處理軟體負#以所有的通過 及根據通話狀態的轉變順序,進行從目前狀態轉換 個狀態。藉由圖15之狀態轉移圖來說明狀態變換的 有三種通話的設定狀態:基本通話控制,輔助的服務‘全Page 55 475321 V. Description of the invention (53) ^ Call pause: local, remote. Call suspension canceled: local, Tushan 10. Call transfer: base station spot = incoming or outgoing calls to another _; Both Yu and Ji can be transferred to the 2-terminal machine that is used to cross the current conversation path. On the base station, this will be 11. Waiting for the exchange to cancel the cancellation, refusing to stay: accepting the hang-up call 13. Calling in response to Hanqihuawan 14. Wake up: register, accept rejecting 7.6 call status during the time period = yes proceed —The steady state of the call. When the ground connection is performed, the first one is left :: The determined state of the call process. In the base a ;, the connection to the public switched telephone network, the end is established to establish a -line line path. Similarly ,: The mobile phone establishes a telephone line channel (channel). In other words, = Hour = the mobile phone can only communicate with the -substance. The second or other phone is the same process. : Both the base station and the mobile phone that are off. When no one enters the temple, the call status will be initialized to the idle state. When the call event in Dingding is reached, the call status will be changed; ^ lift state. Handling during the call Software Negative # uses all the passes and changes the state from the current state according to the order of call state transitions. The state transition diagram of Figure 15 illustrates three state settings for call transition: basic call control and auxiliary services 'all

五、發明說明(54) ---------- 球通話參考。% 7 6 1 #傻面章節將會描述通話過程狀態。V. Description of the invention (54) ---------- Ball call reference. % 7 6 1 #The silly face chapter will describe the status of the call process.

Pn ]基本通話控制狀態 當沒有壬閒置(無效)狀態 到始色輯、。在這個狀態中,假如偵測 (linls\ ί 1則終端器將會轉變至連線設定狀態 器的狀能絲ΐ疋偵測到拿起話筒事件發生,則將會把終端 態,产換為撥號(DT)狀態。假如終端器是置於保留狀 生,二故二,、改變程式、出現特徵記錄或交換的情況發 、〜端器將會轉換為使用中(IN-USE)的狀態。 1 :通話初始化狀態 話建=疋個起始狀悲,且這個狀態是主控裝置端請求通 行,,的結果。當主控裝置收到來自受控裝置的,,通話進 時,,或是從公共交換式電話網路偵測到有撥號送出 態。則通話初始化狀態將會轉換到P3 (進行通話程序)狀 P2 :重疊送出(OVER-S)狀態 送這是一個起始狀態。當主控裝置端正在使用重疊模式 通話設定資訊給受控裝置端(或是公共交換式電話網 ;時’這個狀態會存在受控裝置端中。 ’ P3 :進行通話程序狀態 . 這是一個起始狀態。當受控裝置端(或公共交拖彳常 話铜%、 、又佚八电 ^路)已經確認所接收的資訊後,主控裝置端會在這個 狀態中,同時,主控裝置端會要求進行通話及等待來自受Pn] Basic call control status When there is no idle (inactive) status, go to the initial color series. In this state, if the detection (linls \ ί 1 then the terminal will change to the state of the connection setting state device), if the event of picking up the microphone occurs, the terminal state will be changed to Dial-up (DT) status. If the terminal is placed on hold, the second terminal will be changed, the program will be changed, and a feature record or exchange will occur. The terminal will switch to the in-use state. 1: Call initialization state: Talk = a start state, and this state is the result of the master device requesting access. When the master device receives a call from the controlled device, the call is in progress, or A dial-up sending status is detected from the public switched telephone network. The call initialization status will be switched to P3 (conducting the call procedure). P2: Overlay sending (OVER-S) status. This is an initial status. When the master The controlling device is using the overlap mode call setting information to the controlled device (or the public switched telephone network; 'This state will be stored in the controlled device.' P3: The call process status. This is a starting state .When the controlled device side ( Or the public traffic company (usually copper%, 佚, 电, 电, 电, 电, 电, 电, 电)) After confirming the received information, the master device will be in this state. At the same time, the master device will request a call and wait for the call

475321475321

控裝置端(或公共交換式電話網路)的進一步反應 裝置端收到來自受控裝置端(式上 ’心 田主控 出的"警示,,訊息後,主控裝置端便會鐘Ί話,:路)所發 狀態。 便會轉換為P4(通話傳送) P4 :通話傳送(CALL-D)狀態 這是一個起始狀態。當受^裝置端(或公共交換式電 話網路)已經處理完所需發出之警示點的通話冑,主控裝 置端會在這個狀態中。而前述所需發出的警示點是來自電 話使用者的指*。當主控裝置端㈣"連線"訊息後便會轉 為P23(傳回振鈴聲)狀態。 P6 :目前通話(CALL-Ρ)狀態 這是一個終端狀態。在收到來自主控裝置端所發出的 通話设定訊息後,但是在尚未決定如何回應前,受控裝置 端會進入這個狀態。在受控裝置端送出"通話進行"訊息 後’受控裝置端便會轉換到P9(由外撥入的通話進行)狀 態。 P7 :通話接收(CALL-R)狀態 這是一個終端狀態。在受控裝置端指示出使用者警示 的起始位置後,便會進入這個狀態。在送出”連線”訊息 後,受控裝置端便會轉換到P8(連線請求)狀態。 P8 :連線請求(CON-R)狀態 - 這是一個終端狀態。當等待接收一個來自主控裝置端 的連線確認訊號時,受控裝置端便會進入這個狀態。當接 收到’’連線確認"m號時,受控康置端便會轉換到ρι 〇(致The control device (or the public switched telephone network) further responds. The device receives a warning from the controlled device (in the form of "Hetian Master Control"), and after the message, the main control device will call ,: Road) issued status. It will switch to P4 (call transmission) P4: call transmission (CALL-D) state This is a starting state. When the receiving device (or the public switched telephone network) has finished processing the call of the alert point to be issued, the master device will be in this state. The warning points mentioned above are the instructions from the telephone user *. When the master device sends a "connection" message, it will switch to P23 (return ring tone) status. P6: Current call (CALL-P) status This is a terminal status. After receiving the call setup message from the master device, but before deciding how to respond, the controlled device will enter this state. After sending a "Call in Progress" message on the controlled device, the 'Controlled Device' will switch to P9 (incoming call). P7: Call reception (CALL-R) status This is a terminal status. This state will be entered after the controlled device indicates the starting position of the user's alert. After sending the "connection" message, the controlled device will switch to P8 (connection request) state. P8: Connection request (CON-R) status-This is a terminal status. When waiting to receive a connection confirmation signal from the master device, the controlled device will enter this state. When receiving the "" connection confirmation "number, the controlled terminal will switch to ρι 〇 (to

第58頁 475321 五、發明說明(56) 動)狀態。 P9 :由外撥入的通話進行(INC一p)狀態 這是一個終端狀態。在受控裝置端已經確認所接收之 需要進行通話的資訊後,便會進入這個狀態。在送出"警 示1'的訊息後’受控裝置端便會轉換到p7(通話接收)狀 態。 P1 0 ··致動狀態 當通話進行在終端對終端的通訊模式下,此狀態才會 出現。此狀態亦稱為談話(TALK)狀態。而通話是在監督模 式中進行。 P11 :斷線請求(DISC-R)狀態 在一終端機A請求產生斷線通話後,這個狀態才會存 在於終端機A内,且藉由另一個終端機來確認前述之狀 態,此確認之終端機稱為終端機B。 P12 :斷線指示(DISC-I)狀態 當終端機A已經指不一斷線請求,而且終端機B尚未表 示釋放或是分離時,這個狀態才會存在於終端機β中。 Ρ19 ··釋放請求(REL-R)狀態 這個狀態存在於回應與釋放請求間,且藉由另一個、終 端機來確認前述之狀態。 Ρ25 :重疊接收(OVER-R)狀態 當主控裝置端正在使用重疊模式送出通話設定嘖訊給 受控裝置端時,這個狀態會存在受控裝置端中。 σ 7. 6. 2輔助的服務Page 58 475321 V. Description of the invention (56) status). P9: In-progress call (INC-p) status This is a terminal status. This state will be entered after the controlled device has confirmed the information it needs to make a call. After sending out the " Warning 1 'message, the controlled device will switch to the p7 (call reception) state. P1 0 ·· Activation status This status appears only when the call is in the terminal-to-terminal communication mode. This state is also called a TALK state. The call takes place in supervised mode. P11: Disconnection request (DISC-R) status This status will exist in terminal A only after a terminal A requests a disconnected call, and the aforementioned status is confirmed by another terminal. The terminal is called terminal B. P12: Disconnection indication (DISC-I) status This status exists in terminal β only when terminal A has indicated a disconnection request and terminal B has not indicated release or separation. P19 ·· Release Request (REL-R) status This status exists between the response and the release request, and the aforementioned status is confirmed by another terminal. P25: OVER-R status When the master device is sending call setup messages to the controlled device using the overlap mode, this status will exist in the controlled device. σ 7. 6. 2 Supported services

475321 五、發明說明(57) -- P13 :分離請求(DET-R)狀態 當終端B進行請求通話分離時,此狀態會存於終端B 中,且前述狀態必須藉由終端A來進行確認。 P14 :分離(DET)狀態 ^ 當通訊頻道已經被釋放,但是通話尚未完全清除時, 會存在此一狀態。 P15 :撥號聲(DT)狀態 這是一個起始狀態。當手機或基地台打開話筒時,會 聽到撥號4待聲。假如進行撥出電話之動作,則真正的電 話撥號聲會經由公共交換之電話網路到基地台,然後被送( 出。無論在何種情況,手機使用者在打開手機話蓋時,他 都會聽到由蜂鳴器(buzzer)所發出的本地撥號聲。在前述 打開手機話蓋狀態下,他都可以藉由按下通話(Ta丨k)按鍵 來進行撥出外線電話’或疋按下内線對講(interc〇m)按鍵 來進行内線對講通話的功能’或是按下程式(pr〇gram)按 鍵來進行程式快速撥號指示及快速撥號碼。在使用者開始 撥入電話號碼後,撥號等待聲響會立即停止,同時終端器 會轉換為集聚號碼(CD)狀態,若是發生撥號斷線、撥號不 通時,則將終端器轉換到斷線(DISC)狀態。假如在打開手 機話蓋,經過第一個數位計時後,都沒有輸入任何按鍵,、 別終端器將會轉換為咆哮聲響(HT)狀態。任何其它的錯誤 情況,都是將終端器轉換為重新命令聲響(RT)狀態。 P16 :集聚號碼(CD)狀態 當使用者開始撥入電話號碼後,終端器便會轉換為此475321 V. Description of the invention (57)-P13: Detach request (DET-R) status When terminal B requests to disconnect the call, this status will be stored in terminal B, and the aforementioned status must be confirmed by terminal A. P14: DET state ^ This state exists when the communication channel has been released but the call has not been completely cleared. P15: Dial Tone (DT) state This is a starting state. When the handset or base station turns on the microphone, dial 4 will be heard. If you make an outgoing call, the real phone dialing sound will be sent to the base station via the public switched telephone network, and then sent out. In any case, when the mobile phone user opens the phone cover, he will Hear the local dialing sound from the buzzer. In the aforementioned state of opening the mobile phone cover, he can dial the outside line by pressing the call button (Ta 丨 k) or press the inside line Intercom button for intercom call function 'or press pr0gram button for program speed dialing instructions and speed dial numbers. After the user starts dialing the phone number, dial Waiting for the sound will stop immediately, and the terminal will switch to the centralized number (CD) state. If there is a dial-up or dial-up failure, the terminal will be switched to the disconnected (DISC) state. If you open the phone cover, After the first digit is counted, no key is input, and the terminal will switch to a growl (HT) state. Any other error conditions will change the terminal Sound re-command (RT) status P16:. Agglomeration number (CD) state when the user starts to dial a phone number, it will be converted to this terminator

第60頁 475321 五、發明說明(58) 狀態。當收到所有的輸入號碼,終端器便會轉換為等待保 留反應(WF-R-R)狀態。撥號終了的偵測是藉由輸入電話號 碼位數的計時結束,或是直接輸入撥號終止(E〇D)按鍵,,#,, 兩者之一來判斷。假如在打開手機話蓋,經過第一個數位 計時後,都沒有輸入任何按鍵,則終端器將會轉換為咆哮 聲響(HT )狀態。如果發生收到一個無效的數字或號碼,終 端器會轉換為重新命令聲響(RT )狀態。假如使用者在撥號 期間終止撥號,則終端器會轉換到斷線(DISC)狀態。 ΡΠ :使用中(IN-USE)狀態 當終端器置於持握使用狀態,且使用中沒有受到其它 — 干擾、程式編輯、特徵註冊或是交換狀態下,仍然是不可 被利用的情況’則表示終端器被設定在此狀態。當通話結 束斷線後’終端器將會轉換為閒置(IDLE)狀態。 P22 :振鈴(RING)狀態 ,疋一個終端狀態。當偵測到有電話撥入時,受控裝 置端器將會振鈴,然而,對於通話起始端會聽到振鈐傳回 ,(RBT)。一旦受控裝置端回應(拿起話筒),則振鈴聲將 停止,且f送出一回覆反應信息到起始終端,同時此通話 會轉換為等待回覆反應(WF-A_R)狀態。假如終端器置於持 握使用狀態,I使用中沒有受到其它干擾、程式編輯、特 舉註冊或是交換狀態下,則終端器會轉換用中 (IN-USE)狀態。 P23 :振鈐傳回聲(RBT)狀態 田又控裝置端完成通話設定後,起始端將會聽到振鈐Page 60 475321 V. Description of the Invention (58) Status. When all the input numbers are received, the terminal will switch to the wait-for-reserve (WF-R-R) state. The detection of the end of dialing is judged by entering the end of time counting of the number of digits of the telephone number, or directly inputting the dialing end (EOD) button, # ,, or both. If the mobile phone cover is opened and no key is input after the first digital timer, the terminal will switch to a growl (HT) state. If an invalid digit or number is received, the terminal will transition to a re-command sound (RT) state. If the user terminates dialing during dialing, the terminal will switch to the disconnected (DISC) state. Π: In-use state When the terminal is placed in a gripped state and is not being used in other situations — interference, program editing, feature registration, or exchange, it is still unavailable. ' The terminator is set in this state. When the call ends, the 'Terminal' will switch to the IDLE state. P22: Ring (RING) status, a terminal status. When a call is detected, the controlled device terminal will ring, however, the ring back (RBT) will be heard at the beginning of the call. Once the controlled device responds (pick up the microphone), the ringing tone will stop, and f will send a response message to the initial terminal, and the call will switch to the WF-A_R state. If the terminal is placed in the hold state and there is no other interference during use, program editing, special registration or exchange, the terminal will switch to the IN-USE state. P23: State of RBT (Vibration Transmitting Echo) (RBT) After the device has completed the call setup, the starter will hear the RPT

475321 五、發明說明(59) 傳回聲同時轉換到此狀態。一旦受控裝置端進行拿起話筒 的動作,受控裝置端便會送出一,,目標端回應”的訊息給主 控裝置端,於是主控裝置端便會轉換為通話(TALK)狀態。 7· 6. 3全球通話參考 P26 :睡眠(SLEEP)狀態 這是一個手機狀態。每當手機在唤醒期間,假如沒有 出現通話請求的話,手機便會進入睡眠狀態,而且手機在 此狀態時是置於等待準備模式,並消耗最小的電源功率。 P27 :嗔醒狀態 這是一個手機狀態。在手機進入睡眠期間後,便會轉 換為此狀態。在這個狀態中,手機是不斷進行偵測是否有 f何來自其他終端機的通話請求。當在喚醒狀態中,假如 ;又有發現任何通話請求’則手機仍然會回到睡眠狀態。 P28 :咆哮聲響(HT)狀態 當下列情況超過第一個數字計時器計時後,假如使用 者沒有輸入任何按鍵資料,則終端機會進入咆哮聲響狀 態·( 1)拿起話筒(打開話機蓋子)同時已聽到撥號準備聲 響,(2)進入程式模式且聽到使用程式撥號準備聲響,及 (3)進入特徵資料使用模式且聽到使用程式撥號準備聲 響。在這個狀態下,咆哮聲響(高頻率音調)會經由蜂鳴器 率績性地送到使用者端,以提醒使用者應該進行適當的處 置。假=使用者關上話機蓋子,按下清除重來(flash) 鍵,或是再次按下通話按鍵(或按下"關閉,,按鍵),咆哮 聲響都將會停止。假如關上話機蓋子,終端器將會轉換為475321 V. Description of the invention (59) The echo is switched to this state at the same time. Once the controlled device performs the action of picking up the microphone, the controlled device will send one, and the target responds with the message "to the master device, and then the master device will switch to the TALK state. 7 · 6.3 Global Call Reference P26: Sleep (SLEEP) This is a mobile phone status. When the mobile phone is awake, if there is no call request, the mobile phone will enter the sleep state, and the mobile phone is placed in this state. Wait for the standby mode and consume the minimum power. P27: Awake state This is a mobile phone state. After the mobile phone enters the sleep period, it will switch to this state. In this state, the mobile phone is constantly detecting whether there is f Any call requests from other terminals. When in the awake state, if any call requests are found, the phone will still return to sleep. P28: Roaring sound (HT) state When the following conditions exceed the first digital time After the timer is counted, if the user does not input any key information, the terminal will enter into a roaring state. (1) Pick up the microphone (open the phone cover ) At the same time, you have heard the dial preparation sound, (2) you enter the program mode and hear the use of program dial preparation sound, and (3) you enter the feature data use mode and you hear the use of program dial preparation sound. In this state, the growl sound (high frequency tone ) Will be delivered to the user end via a buzzer to remind the user to take appropriate measures. False = The user closes the phone cover, presses the flash button, or presses the call again If you press the button (or press the "Close" button, the growl will stop. If you close the phone cover, the terminal will switch to

4/奴丄 五、發明說明(6〇) 會轉換為 通話過程 用者在完 設定雙向 完整電話 等等。因 來通知使 或是離開 :或者假如按下清除重來鍵’終端器將4 / Slave 5. The invention description (60) will be converted to the call process. Because of the notification, either leave: or if you press the clear restart button, the terminal will

Pj9 :重新命令聲響(RT)狀態 每备通話過程中遇到任何不正常的情況下, ,會轉換到這個狀態。不正常的情況例如是:使 t特徵資料存取後失效,沒有發現一個可以提供 連線的請求頻道或是通訊頻道,使用者在撥出一 號碼後失效,所提出的請求被遠端的一方拒絕, 為系統會利用前述不正常情況時的重新命令聲響 用者’以致於使用者可以選擇重新進行撥號過程 兩者之一來處理。 8·訊號結構 訊號結構是依據國際標準組織之開放式系統連線參考 模型來建構。在圖1 6中所敘述的是訊號結構的三個階層構 造。 ~~ 、—-— 8 · 1訊號/控制資料的多工與 在每一個分時雙工資料框塞滿的情況下,資料才會被 包袠起來並傳送出去,且前述之資料包裹格式為多工戍 T -多工之分時雙工包裹格式兩者之一。資料包裹的長度是 7 6 8 k 元。 8. 2 道。第一個頻道是使用在初始模式,其作用是利用連線古青Pj9: Reordering the sound (RT) state When any abnormal situation is encountered during each standby call, it will switch to this state. The abnormal situation is, for example, that the access to the t feature data is invalidated, no request channel or communication channel that can provide a connection is found, the user fails after dialing a number, and the request is made by the remote party The rejection is because the system will use the re-command sound when the abnormal situation described above occurs, so that the user can choose to perform the dialing process again. 8 · Signal structure The signal structure is based on the open system connection reference model of the International Standards Organization. Described in Figure 16 is a three-level structure of the signal structure. ~~ 、 —-— 8 · 1 signal / control data is multiplexed and the data is only packed and transmitted when the time-sharing duplex data frame is full, and the aforementioned data package format is Multiplex 戍 T-Multiplexed time-division duplex package format. The length of the data package is 768 k yuan. 8. 2 lanes. The first channel is used in the initial mode, its role is to use the connection

第63頁 五、發明說明(61) 來找出閒置的連線頻道,同時決定受控裝置端器 及手ίΐΐ值。因此’僅有12個通訊頻道可以提供基地台 及手機間進行各種不同的通話。 8· 識別碼的交^_ .置之間建立好雙向的i訊方式 白=芝隻乏助週2性地交換安全識別碼的交握訊 息來監控連線的一' -~一---- 1 ii—多工的格式中,安全識別碼及一些其它的控制位 =,貝傳送識別碼確認(ID-0K)與識別碼遺失(ID_L0ST)的 在ί: ϋ!工的格式卜控制字元會提供交握的資訊。 ,”一/9^^持了三個本地計時器:几以(1〇〇微秒) 收到1的::):Thlost(5秒)。當主控裝置或受控裝置 時這些計時器便會被重置。在加計時器計 別猓^ 4夺會达出一安全識別碼的交握訊息,其中安全識 字元存在於兩個連續資料框中的連續訊號 控制式、事件號竭、及安全識別瑪組成此 識別踽盥:谷。依據上述原貝卜接收器會將所收到的安全 ;!!=己的安全識別碼進行確認比對,假如前述兩種 確(H:對、ΐ果是吻合的’ 會送出-安全識別碼正 碼正確的却:铒ν無論在什麼時候,假如收到安全識別 動交握過^心所有的計時器會被重置,同時會再次啟 L 計時器計時終了·,假如沒有收到安 馬正確的訊息,則隨後會送出-安全識別瑪—失誤Page 63 5. Description of the invention (61) to find idle connection channels, and at the same time determine the terminal and hand value of the controlled device. Therefore, there are only 12 communication channels that can provide various calls between base stations and mobile phones. 8 · Intersection of identification codes ^ _. Establish a two-way i-signal method between devices. White = Zhi only helps to exchange handshake messages of security identification codes to monitor the connection. -1 ii—In the multiplexed format, the security identification code and some other control bits =, the transmission of the identification code confirmation (ID-0K) and the missing identification code (ID_L0ST) are in the format: control format of the control word Yuan will provide handshake information. "" / 9 ^^ holds three local timers: several (100 microseconds) received 1: :): Thlost (5 seconds). These timers when the master device or controlled device It will be reset. When the timer is counted, ^^ will give a handshake message of a security identifier, in which the security literacy elements are in continuous signal control type, event number exhaustion in two continuous data frames, And security identification matrix to form this identification 踽: valley. According to the above original Babb receiver will receive the received security; !! = own security identification code to confirm and compare, if the two above are confirmed (H: right, If the fruit is consistent, it will be sent out-the security identification code is correct, but: 铒 ν If at any time, if the security identification is received, all timers will be reset, and at the same time, L will be turned on again. The timer is over. If you do n’t receive the correct message from Anma, it will be sent out later.

第64頁 475321 五、發明說明(62) (ID-LOST)的訊息。當Thlost計時器計時終了時,表示已 經有5秒鐘都沒有收到任何安全識別碼正確的訊息,這時 原來的連線將會分開,同時第一階層將會再次進行擷取連 線訊號及設定雙向通訊。假如上述步驟失效,則此次通話 將會斷線。 上述使用於基地台及手機間交握用的計時器亦相同適 用於手機與手機間的交握過程。 第二階層之計時器 主控裝置端 受控裝置端 計時器 事件 背景 背景 無 接收有效的安全識別碼的交握控 制字元,假如正確則送出一安全 識別碼_正確的信息 等待安全識別碼_正確的信息, 假如收到,則重置全部三個計時 器同時重進行交握過程 100微秒 100微秒 Thtx 送出安全識別碼的交握控制字元 250微秒 250微秒 Thrx 送出安全識別碼_失誤的信息 5秒 5秒 Thlost 離開線上連結同時重建立連線 8. 4雙向連線通訊事件 L 接收有效的安全識別碼的交握控制字元,假如JL 4則送出一安全識別碼正確的信息。 2.等待安全識別碼正確的信息,假如收到,則重置 全部三個計時器同時重進行交握過程。送出安全識別碼的Page 64 475321 V. Information of Invention Description (62) (ID-LOST). When the Thlost timer expires, it means that it has not received any message with the correct security ID for 5 seconds. At this time, the original connection will be separated, and the first layer will retrieve the connection signal and settings again. Two-way communication. If the above steps fail, the call will be disconnected. The timers used for handshaking between the base station and the mobile phone are also applicable to the handshaking process between the mobile phone and the mobile phone. Second-level timer Master control device Controlled device-side timer Event background Background There is no handshake control character that receives a valid security identification code. If it is correct, a security identification code is sent_correct information waiting for security identification code_ Correct information. If received, reset all three timers and restart the handshake process at the same time. 100 microseconds 100 microseconds Thtx Handshake control characters that send out security identification code 250 microseconds 250 microseconds Thrx send out security identification code _Missing information 5 seconds 5 seconds Thlost leaves the online connection and re-establishes the connection 8. 4 Two-way connection communication event L Receives a handshake control character of a valid security ID, if JL 4 sends a security ID correct information. 2. Wait for the correct information of the security identification code. If received, reset all three timers and repeat the handshake process simultaneously. Submitting a Security ID

第65頁 五、發明說明(63) ^握控制字7〇。送出安全識別碼失誤的信息。離開線上連 結同時重建立連線。 ^第卩自層支援著雙.向連線的通訊設定、控制,及頻道 1測。 e、、ai =述之頻道量測是藉由下列兩種測定方式來實施··一 ϋ广徒無線電波模組所輸入的接收訊號強度指示器 8·5值連線另維^ ^ 的頻ί ί Ϊ濩f括三個工作:傳送功率的控制,分配合適 多工:換厂衰、、、:員率偏移調整、協定初始化、協定承認,及 夕工切換(傳达多工/接收多工)。 制器控!控制。在背景時,控 果:切斷,低功率,=及:2取值會有四種分界結 切斷分界值,m表示功率太小:;假如功率值是小於 率位準是設定在最高& $ gi,里 ,假如使用中的功 時再-次重建立統將會分離通訊連線,同 的警示燈,並提昇功率至 ,糸統將會亮起超出範圍 功率位準是在切斷與低級的位準。假如使用中的 下會亮起超出範圍的警示严了並,在系統允許的條件 準;·假如使用中的功率位=B二k幵功率至較高一級的位 統允許的條件下會降低功高:率分界則在系 外的其他情況,系統將4;;;=的位準。除前述之 8 · 6訊號的信息袼式 475321 五、發明說明(64) 訊號的信息是透過訊號頻道來進行轉移,而這些訊號 的信息是藉由在接收多工或是傳送多工之分時雙工包裹的 訊號場中的數個位元所構成,同時前述之信息可由第— 層、第二層、或第三層來產生。這些資訊是由多層資料框 的訊號區域來承載,同時前述資訊亦形成了進入的控制字 元。這些控制字元的長度是可變的,同時會隨著資訊的形 式而有所不同。對於多層資料框的訊號信息的正破性,^ 依照順序的次區域來實施驗證。假如發生一個或多個資料 框資料遺失,則接收器必須請求發生資料遺失的資料框進 行重新送出。對於單層資料框訊號信息,並不需要去驗證 順序問題。, ^ 格式化形式(F T)規定編碼-字元的形式。以下所描述 的是格式化形式的定義。 格式化形式=0 :在主控裝置端與受控裝置端間建立/ 清除一頻道連線。所有的信息依照S-多工的格式及第一層 的協定。 所百的信息依照S-多工的 格式化形式 格式及第三層的協定。 格式化形式=2 :維持及管理頻道的連線狀況,而前述 之連線狀況包括頻道偏置調整、㈣位準控制、識別碼編 譯與.解識別碼丄辨識識別碼交握過程之錯 校 正❶所有的信息依照τ-多工的格式及第二層的協 - 格式化形式=3 ··承載在通話期間所需要的資訊元件。 所有的信息依照T-多工的格式及第三層的協定。Page 65 V. Description of the invention (63) ^ Grip control word 70. Message that the security identification code is incorrect. Leave the online connection and re-establish the connection. ^ The second layer supports communication settings, control, and channel 1 measurement for dual-way connections. e., ai = The channel measurement described above is implemented by the following two methods of measurement: · The received signal strength indicator 8 · 5 value input by the Guangtu radio wave module is connected to another frequency ^ ^ ί ί Ϊ 濩 f includes three tasks: control of transmission power, allocation of appropriate multiplexing: change of factory failure, adjustment of staffing rate, agreement initialization, agreement recognition, and night work switching (transmitting multiplexing / receiving Multiplexing). Controller control! control. In the background, control fruit: cut off, low power, = and: 2 values will have four cutoff junction cutoff cutoff values, m indicates that the power is too small: if the power value is less than the rate level is set to the highest & $ gi, here, if the power is used again, the system will be disconnected again and again, the same warning light, and the power will be increased, the system will light up. The power level is off. With low level. If the lower limit is in use, the warning that exceeds the range is strict and the conditions allowed by the system are accurate; · If the power level in use = B 2k 幵 power to a higher level, the power will be reduced High: The rate boundary is in other cases outside the department, the system will set the level of 4 ;;; =. In addition to the above-mentioned 8 · 6 signal information method 475321 V. Description of the invention (64) The signal information is transferred through the signal channel, and the information of these signals is obtained by receiving multiple jobs or transmitting multiple jobs. The signal field of the duplex package is composed of several bits, and the aforementioned information can be generated by the first layer, the second layer, or the third layer. This information is carried by the signal area of the multi-layer data frame, and the aforementioned information also forms the entry control characters. The length of these control characters is variable and varies with the form of the information. For the correctness of the signal information of the multi-layer data frame, the verification is performed in the order of the sub-regions. If one or more data frames are lost, the receiver must request a re-submission of the data frame in which the data was lost. For single-layer data frame signal information, there is no need to verify the sequence problem. , ^ Formatted format (FT) specifies the encoding-character form. What is described below is the definition of the format. Format format = 0: Establish / clear a channel connection between the master device and the controlled device. All information follows the S-multiplex format and the first level agreement. All the information is in the format of the S-multiplex format and the agreement of the third layer. Formatting form = 2: Maintain and manage the connection status of the channel, and the aforementioned connection status includes channel offset adjustment, level control, identification code compilation, and error correction during the de-identification and identification handshaking process. ❶All information is in accordance with the τ-multiplex format and the second layer of the co-formatted form = 3. It carries the information elements needed during the call. All information follows the T-multiplex format and the third-level agreement.

第67頁 475321 五、發明說明(65) 8. 6. 1連線建立/清除信息 連線建立的訊息包括連線請求、連線請求確認、連線 再次請求、連線同意、連線同意確認、及連線設定拒絕的 訊息。連線清除的信息則是包括連線釋放及連線完全釋 放。前述所有的訊息都是依照S-多工的格式,以下將描述 在每一個訊息中所承載的資訊内容。 發信範圍的規劃 位元7位元6位元5位元4 位元3位元2位元1位兀〇 格式形式=0 頻道號碼 訊息 通話: ..補充 樣式 樣式 説明 8 · 6 · 1 · 1連線請求訊息 無論在什麼時候,當主控裝置進行撥出外線電話的初 始化動作、回應撥入之外線電話、初始化内線通話、及/ 或疋進行電話特徵/功能鍵的組編時,都需要一頻率頻 道。透過前述頻道之傳送,連線請求的訊息可用來通知受 控裝置端’使受控裝置端知道必須進行連線設定,並藉由 使^这個訊息,使得受控裝置可以決定頻率偏置量,意即 決疋數值控制振盪器值。而且,前述的這些訊息都是經由 一般頻道來送出。在每一個訊息中所承載的資訊内容包 括··Page 67 475321 V. Description of the invention (65) 8. 6. 1 Connection establishment / clear information Connection establishment messages include connection request, connection request confirmation, connection re-request, connection consent, connection consent confirmation , And connection settings rejected messages. The connection clear information includes connection release and connection full release. All the aforementioned messages are in the S-multiplex format, and the content of the information carried in each message will be described below. Sending range planning bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Format form = 0 Channel number Message call: .. Supplementary style style description 8 · 6 · 1 · 1 Connection request message Whenever the main control device performs the initialization of an outgoing outside call, responds to an incoming outside call, initializes an internal call, and / or performs a combination of phone features / function keys Need a frequency channel. Through the transmission of the aforementioned channel, the message of the connection request can be used to notify the controlled device 'to let the controlled device know that connection settings must be made, and by using this message, the controlled device can determine the frequency offset , Meaning that the value of the oscillator is controlled numerically. In addition, the aforementioned messages are all sent through the general channel. The information content carried in each message includes ...

第68頁 475321Page 68 475321

1 ·安全密碼的識別碼。 2 ·傳送者的終端識別碼。 3.接收者的終端識別碼。 4·控制範圍··連線請求的命令。 5· 發信範圍: (a) 通訊頻道號碼, (b) 通話樣式:由外撥入、由内撥出、内線/呼叫、 特別功能使用、插撥、轉接等等, (c) 連線晴本訊息的計數。 8 · b · 1 · 2連線請求確認訊息 一旦受控裝置接收了至少三次正息 後,受控裝置便會送出連缘%f綠明求汛 控穿置,同睥的訊息,以回應給主 徑褒置π時又控裝置會利用所選擇 線設定。這個訊息將會以每2微秒讯頻道來進仃連 並經由所選擇的通訊頻道來送出。在、言·"',持續20微秒, 資訊内容包括如下: &個訊息中所承載的 1 *安全密碼的識別碼。 2·傳送者的終端識別碼。 3·接收者的終端識別碼。 4 ·控制範圍··連線設定的命令。 5 ·發信範圍·· (a )通訊頻道號碼, (b)通話樣式:由外撥入、由内 特別功能使用、插撥、轉接等等,及$出、内線/呼叫、 475321 五、發明說明(67) (C )連線請求確認訊息的計數。 8. 6 · 1 · 3連線請求訊息 在收到來自受控裝置所送出的連線請求確認訊息後, 主控裝置將會送出連線請求訊息到受控裝置,使再次建立 之前的連線’如此可以避免已經分配到的頻道變成不可使 用的頻道。假如發生頻道變換,則連線請求訊息將會傳送 新選擇之通訊頻道的資訊。前述之新頻道資訊,除了通訊 頻道的號碼及命令外,所有其他的資料會與原連線請求訊 息的内容¥目同。 8 · 6 · 1 · 4連線同意訊息 主控裝置在收到連線同意訊息後會分派一個通訊頻 道’以作為與文控裝置間的通訊連線。這個訊息常用於傳 送所有的頻道資訊到受控裝置,同時會依據所傳送的資訊 來更新頻道=貝料庫的内容。這個訊息的内容包括如下: 1 ·安全密碼的識別碼。 2·傳送者的終端識別碼。 3 ·接收者的終端識別碼。 4·控制範圍:連線同意的命令。 5 ·發信範圍: (a )通訊頻道號渴。 .(:)通話樣式:由外 74. ro · 特別功能使用、插撥、轉接等等 ♦為^連線同意確認訊息 曰^工裝置接收到所有的頻道資訊時,表示受控裝置1 · Security code identification code. 2 · Terminal ID of the sender. 3. The recipient's terminal identification code. 4 · Control range ·· Command for connection request. 5 · Sending range: (a) communication channel number, (b) call style: dial-in from outside, dial-in from inside, intercom / call, use of special functions, plug-in, transfer, etc., (c) connection Count of clear messages. 8 · b · 1 · 2 Connection request confirmation message Once the controlled device has received at least three positive messages, the controlled device will send out a connection ff Luming asking for flood control, a peer message in response to When the main diameter is set to π, the control device will use the selected line setting. This message will be connected every 2 microseconds and sent via the selected communication channel. The word "" 'lasts for 20 microseconds, and the information content includes the following: & 1 * Security password identification code carried in the message. 2. Terminal ID of the sender. 3. The recipient's terminal identification code. 4 · Control range ·· Commands for connection setting. 5 · Sending range · (a) communication channel number, (b) call style: dial in from outside, use special functions from inside, dial in, transfer, etc., and $ out, extension / call, 475321 DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION (67) (C) The count of the connection request confirmation message. 8. 6 · 1 · 3 Connection request message After receiving the connection request confirmation message from the controlled device, the master control device will send a connection request message to the controlled device so that the previous connection is established again. 'This prevents the assigned channels from becoming unusable. If a channel change occurs, the connection request message will send information about the newly selected communication channel. The aforementioned new channel information, except for the communication channel number and order, all other information will be the same as the content of the original connection request message. 8 · 6 · 1 · 4 Connection consent message After receiving the connection consent message, the master control device will assign a communication channel ′ as a communication connection with the text control device. This message is often used to send all channel information to the controlled device. At the same time, it will update the content of the channel = beer database according to the transmitted information. The contents of this message include the following: 1 The identification code of the security password. 2. Terminal ID of the sender. 3 · The recipient's terminal identification code. 4. Scope of control: the order to agree to the connection. 5 · Transmission range: (a) The communication channel number is thirsty. . (:) Calling style: from outside 74. ro · Special function use, dial-in, transfer, etc. ♦ Confirmation message for ^ connection agreement When the industrial device receives all channel information, it means controlled device

第70頁 ----- 五、發明說明(68) ^-- ^經準備好要經由主控裝置所選擇的通訊頻 :,然後送出連線同意確認的訊息給主 通 個確認的動作。這個訊息的内容包括如下·· 以作為 1 · 安全密碼的識別碼。 2·傳送者的終端識別竭。 3 ·接收者的終端識別石馬。 4·控制範圍:連線設定的命令。 5 · 發信範圍: (a) 通訊頻道號碼。 ⑻表通話樣式:由外撥入、由内撥出、内線/ 、 特別功能使用、插撥、轉接等等^ 8 · 6 · 1 · 6連線設定拒絕 爽谁/當置f法同意經由主控裝置所選擇的通訊頰3 Φί ¥ 5時,受控裝置將會送出連線設定拒絕的訊自^ 主控裝置。因此,主批酤 ·、、、、、' 道及為要的頻道,缺絲田 步 追個訊息的内容包括如下: 1乍 女全岔碼的識別,。 傳送者的終端識別碼。 接收者的終端識別碼。 控制範圍:遠綠ρη 欲A, 逆線冋意確認的命令。 發信範圍: ' (a) 通訊頻道號碼, (b) 通話樣式·丄Al ^ 飞·由外撥入、由内撥出、内線/呼叫、 五、發明說明(69) 特別功能使用、插撥、轉接等等,及 (C )拒絕理由:基地台忙線中、所有的通訊頻道忙線 中、所有請求的頻道忙線中、型式不吻合、協定型式不吻 合、或是所有的無線電載波忙線中。 8· 6· 1· 7連結通道釋放 、 當通話被切斷時,主控裝置(Master)會將該訊息傳給 又控裝置(Slave)以通知結束該雙向通訊。該訊息所傳遞 的資訊描述如下。 8· 6· ί· 8釋放連結之完整訊息 (、 受控裝置會將該訊息傳回主控裝置以回應通訊通道結 束之完成。一旦主控裝置收到該訊息,會結束該通訊通 道。類似的資訊以釋放連結之完整訊息來傳遞。 1 ·安全密碼的識別碼。 2 ·傳送者的終端識別碼。 3 ·接收者的終端識別碼。 4·控制範圍:完整之釋放連結指令 5 ·發信範圍: (a) 通訊通道號碼 (b) 通話樣式:由外撥入、由内撥出、内線/呼叫、 特別功能使用、插撥、轉接等等。 8 · 6 · 2設定通話資訊訊息 在進入雙向語音交談狀態之前,必須先建立呼叫路 徨。該階段所需要的訊息為:呼叫設定、呼叫設定認可、 呼叫進行、呼叫進行認可、提醒、提醒認可、連接、以及Page 70 ----- V. Description of the invention (68) ^-^ Prepared to pass the communication frequency selected by the master control device :, and then send a connection consent confirmation message to the master to confirm the action. The contents of this message include the following: · 1 as an identification code for the security password. 2. Terminal identification of the transmitter is exhausted. 3 · The receiver's terminal identifies the Shima. 4. Control range: the command for setting the connection. 5 · Sending range: (a) Communication channel number. ⑻ Table call style: dial-in from outside, dial-in from outside, intercom /, special function use, dial-in, transfer, etc. ^ 8 6 6 1 When the communication device selected by the master control device is 3 5 5 ¥, the controlled device will send a message that the connection setting is rejected from the master control device. Therefore, the main appraisal of · ,,,,,, and "channels" and "required channels", the content of this message includes the following: The terminal identifier of the sender. The recipient's terminal identification code. Control range: Far green ρη For A, command to confirm intentionally against the line. Sending range: '(a) Communication channel number, (b) Call style · 丄 Al ^ Fly · Dial in from outside, dial out from inside, intercom / call, V. Description of the invention (69) Use of special functions, plug in , Transfer, etc., and (C) reasons for rejection: the base station is busy, all communication channels are busy, all requested channels are busy, the types do not match, the agreement types do not match, or all radio carriers Busy. 8. 6 · 1 · 7 Link channel release. When the call is disconnected, the master device will send the message to the slave device to notify the end of the two-way communication. The information passed in this message is described below. 8 · 6 · ί · 8 Release the linked complete message (, the controlled device will return the message to the master device in response to the completion of the communication channel. Once the master device receives the message, it will end the communication channel. Similar The information is transmitted as a complete message to release the link. 1 · The identification code of the security password. 2 · The terminal identification code of the sender. 3 · The terminal identification code of the receiver. 4 · Control range: complete release of the connection instruction 5 · Send Letter range: (a) Communication channel number (b) Call style: dial in from outside, dial out from inside, intercom / call, use of special features, dial, transfer, etc. 8 · 6 · 2 Set call information message Before entering a two-way voice conversation state, a call route must be established. The messages required at this stage are: call setup, call setup approval, call progress, call approval, reminder, reminder approval, connection, and

第72頁 475321 五、發明說明(70) '~~ 連接認可訊息。在該時期使用S-多工格式。為完全利用頻 寬以及加快處理速度,補充的範圍亦被用來傳遞建立該呼 叫路徑所需的所有資訊。多重信號框(f rames)亦可選擇性 地被使用於傳遞資訊。訊息型式被包含在發信範圍。'除了 訊息型式外,其他如通道號碼、呼叫型式、要求被回絕的 理由亦於發信範圍傳遞。發信範圍顯示如下。 、 發信範圍規劃 位元7位元6位元5位开t 4 位元3位元2位元1 位元〇 ^式型式=ί~~·~" 通道號碼 訊息型式 通話型式 補充Page 72 475321 V. Description of the invention (70) '~~ Connection approval message. The S-multiplex format was used during this period. In order to fully utilize the bandwidth and speed up the processing, the supplementary range is also used to convey all the information needed to establish the call path. Multiple signal frames (frames) can also be selectively used to convey information. Message types are included in the scope of the message. 'In addition to the message type, other reasons such as channel number, call type, and request rejection are also transmitted in the scope of the letter. The sending range is shown below. 、 Sending range planning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit t 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 ^ Type Type = ί ~~~~ " Channel Number Message Type Call Type Supplement

δ. D. Z terminal)應送出所有涂 置端(sUve 建立㈣徑之資訊, 。該机息包括下列資訊: ,2·傳送者的終端識別碼。 3·接收者的終端識別碼。 - 制範圍:完整之釋放連結指令。 5·發信範圍: 7δ. D. Z terminal) shall send all the information of the coating terminal (sUve to establish the path.) The machine information includes the following information: 2. Terminal ID of the sender. 3. Terminal ID of the receiver. Scope: complete release link instructions 5 · Sending range: 7

475321 五、發明說明(71) (a) 格式型式:通話建立, (b) 通訊通道號碼, (c) 通話樣式:由外撥入、由内撥出、内線/呼叫、 特別功能使用、插撥、轉接等等。 (d) 回絕理由:基地台忙線中、所有通訊通道忙線 中、所有要求通道忙線中、型式不搭配、協定型式不搭 配、或所有的RF忙線中。 6.補充範圍: (a) 被呼叫之目錄編號, (b) 授權號碼(選擇性), (c) 帳戶號碼(選擇性)。 8. 6. 2. 2 通話設定請求確認 當受控裝置端收到部分之呼叫資訊,需回覆主控裝琶端一 ^ --— --— --—^ 確言並要求更多的呼叫資訊。下列的資訊被包含在該 訊息中。 1. 安全密碼的識別碼。 2. 傳送者的終端識別碼。 3. 接收者的終端識別碼。 4. 控制範圍:呼叫設定要求確認指令。 5. 發信範圍: (e) 格式型式:通話建立, - (f ) 通訊通道號碼, (g)通話樣式:由外撥入、由内撥出、内線/啤叫、 特別功能使用、插撥、轉接等等,475321 V. Description of the invention (71) (a) Format type: call establishment, (b) communication channel number, (c) call style: dial-in from outside, dial-in from outside, extension / call, use of special functions, plug-in , Transfer, and more. (d) Reasons for rejection: the base station is busy, all communication channels are busy, all required channels are busy, the type is not matched, the agreement type is not matched, or all RF lines are busy. 6. Supplementary scope: (a) directory number called, (b) authorized number (optional), (c) account number (optional). 8. 6. 2. 2 Call setting request confirmation When the controlled device receives part of the call information, it is necessary to reply to the master control device. ^ --- --- --- ^ Confirm and request more call information . The following information is included in the message. 1. The identification code of the security password. 2. Terminal ID of the sender. 3. The recipient's terminal identification code. 4. Control range: call setting requires confirmation instruction. 5. Sending range: (e) Format type: call establishment,-(f) communication channel number, (g) call style: dial-in from outside, dial-in from outside, intercom / beer calling, special function use, plug-in , Forwarding, etc.

第74頁 五、發明說明(72) (h)回絕理由:基基地台忙線中、所右m 中、所有要求通道忙後中、却十^ 有 通道忙線 配、或所有_^^型式不搭配、協定型式不搭 ?主!Λ通話設定要求確認收到之訊息 回覆給將該訊自 攸i置作^確認,使受控萝 序了一~繼續進彳丁之後程 -_f J的貝5fl被包含在該訊--- 安全密碼的識別碼。 傳送者的終端識別碼。 接收者的終端識別碼。 控制範圍:呼叫設定要求確認接收指令。 發信範圍: (a)格式型式:通話建立, (b )通訊通道號碼, (:)通話樣式:由外撥入、由内撥出、内線/呼叫、 特别功能使用、插撥、轉接等等, 中 配 (d)回絕理由:基地台忙線中、所有通訊通道忙線 ,有要求通道忙線中、型式不搭配、協定型式不搭 或所有的RF忙線中。 8 · 6 · 2 · 4通話進行訊息 。由於為一外部呼叫情形,基地站(受控 ^ 會將該資訊轉傳給PSTN。當基地站將該訊息傳給主 裒置後,不會等待從PSTN接收通話進行訊息。下列的資訊Page 74 V. Explanation of the invention (72) (h) Reason for rejection: base station is busy, all right m, all required channels are busy, but there are ten busy channels, or all _ ^^ types Do not match, do not match the agreement type? Master! Λ call settings request confirmation of the received message in reply to the message from ^ i to confirm ^, make the controlled order a ~ continue to the next step -_f J's 5fl was included in the news --- the identification code of the security password. The terminal identifier of the sender. The recipient's terminal identification code. Control range: call setting requires confirmation of receiving instructions. Sending range: (a) Format type: call establishment, (b) communication channel number, (:) call style: dial-in from outside, dial-in from outside, intercom / call, use of special functions, plug-in, transfer, etc. (D) Reasons for rejection: the base station is busy, all communication channels are busy, there are requirements for channels to be busy, the types are not matched, the protocol types are not matched, or all RF lines are busy. 8 · 6 · 2 · 4 call progress message. Due to an external call situation, the base station (controlled ^ will relay this information to the PSTN. When the base station passes the message to the host, it will not wait to receive a call for the message from the PSTN. The following information

第75頁 475321 五、發明說明(73) 被包含在該訊息中: 1. 安全密碼的識別碼。 2. 傳送者的終端識別碼。 3. 接收者的終端識別碼。 4. 控制範圍:通話進行指令。 5. 發信範圍: (a) 格式型式:通話建立, (b) 通訊通道號碼, (c) 通話樣式:由外撥入、由内撥出、内線/呼叫、 特別功能使用、插撥、轉接等等。 6 ·回絕理由:基地台忙線中、所有通訊通道忙線中、 所有要求通道忙線中、型式不搭配、協定型式不搭配、或 所有的RF忙線中。 8. 6. 2. 5通話進行接收訊息 當裝置端接收到覆給從 一確認訊息,使受控裝置端可繼續之後程序。下列的資訊 .—-— -----— _____________________ 被包含在該訊息中。 1. 安全密碼的識別碼。 2. 傳送者的終端識別碼。 3. 接收者的終端識別碼。 4. 控制範圍:通話進行指令。 . δ·發信範圍: (a) 格式型式:通話建立, (b) 通訊通道號碼,Page 75 475321 V. Description of the Invention (73) Included in the message: 1. The identification code of the security password. 2. Terminal ID of the sender. 3. The recipient's terminal identification code. 4. Scope of control: call instruction. 5. Sending range: (a) Format type: call establishment, (b) communication channel number, (c) call style: dial-in from outside, dial-in from outside, extension / call, use of special functions, plug-in, transfer Then wait. 6 · Rejection reasons: the base station is busy, all communication channels are busy, all required channels are busy, the types are not matched, the protocol types are not matched, or all RF lines are busy. 8. 6. 2. 5 call to receive the message When the device receives a reply message, the controlled device can continue the process. The following information .—-— -----— _____________________ is included in the message. 1. The identification code of the security password. 2. Terminal ID of the sender. 3. The recipient's terminal identification code. 4. Scope of control: call instruction. δ · Sending range: (a) Format type: call establishment, (b) communication channel number,

第76頁 五、發明說明(74) (C )通話樣式··由外撥入、 特別功能使用、插撥、轉接等等 由内撥出 内線/呼叫Page 76 V. Description of the invention (74) (C) Call style ·· Incoming from outside, using special functions, dialing, transferring, etc. Outward from inside

6 ·回絕理由·· 所有要求通道忙線 所有的RF忙線中。 基地台忙線中、 中、型式不搭配 所有通訊通道忙線中 、協定型式不搭配、 或 8 · 6 · 2 · 6提醒訊息 理後:^資?Li開始進行通話處 該訊息給主控裝置端作為通話進行中 Ϊνί ί Ϊ Ϊ 話;^ 心、°、 别’需等待從pSTN傳來的提醒訊息。若基地站 在超過預β又時間後均未收到呼叫進行訊息,該呼叫設定將 被視為無^效。下列的資訊被包含在該訊息中: 1 ·安全密碼的識別碼。 2·傳送者的終端識別碼。 3·接收者的終端識別碼。 4 ·控制範圍:提醒指令。 5 ·發信範圍: (a)格式型式:通話建立, (b )通訊通道號碼, (c )通話樣式:由外撥入、由内撥出、内線/呼叫、 ,別功月b使用、插撥、轉接等等。 6·回絕理由:基地台忙線中、所有通訊通道忙旅中、 所有要求通道忙線中、型式不搭配、協定型式不搭配、或 所有的RF忙線中。 475321 五、發明說明(75) 8. 6. 2. 7提醒收到訊息 當主控裝置端收到j JI 菝訊息給從裝 * — -- 一* " '一' · " ---一 ~—— -—— 置,使受控裝置端繼續進行後續的程序。下列的資訊被包 ~〜一—-—- - ——--- —---——__ 含在該訊息中: 1. 安全密碼的識別碼。 2. 傳送者的終端識別碼。 3. 接收者的終端識別碼。 4. 控制範圍:提醒收到指令。 5. 發信範圍: (a) 格式型式:通話建立, (b) 通訊通道號碼, (c) 通話樣式:由外撥入、由内撥出、内線/呼叫、 特別功能使用、插撥、轉接等等。 6. 回絕理由:基地台忙線中、所有通訊通道忙線 中、所有要求通道忙線中、型式不搭配、協定型式不搭 配、或所有的RF忙線中。 8. 6. 2. 8連接訊息 該訊由受控裝置端送出,藉以通知主控裝置端已 〆 -^ ------—^^ __—、 收 外會將息:傳給 基^^手機)。在受^控t置端,他 提^主控裝置端., 使用考。下列的資訊被包含在該訊息冲: 1. 安全密碼的識別碼。 2. 傳送者的終端識別碼。6 · Rejection reasons ·· All required channels are busy All RF busy lines. The base station is busy, the middle, and the type are not matched. All communication channels are busy, the protocol type is not matched, or 8 · 6 · 2 · 6 reminder message. After processing: ^? Li starts the call. This message is sent to the master device as a call in progress. Ϊνί ί Ϊ Ϊ; ^ heart, °, do n’t wait for the reminder message from pSTN. If the base station does not receive a call progress message after the pre-beta time has passed, the call setting will be considered ineffective. The following information is included in the message: 1 The identification code of the security password. 2. Terminal ID of the sender. 3. The recipient's terminal identification code. 4 · Control range: reminding instructions. 5 · Sending range: (a) Format type: call establishment, (b) communication channel number, (c) call style: dial-in from outside, dial-in from outside, intercom / call, use, plug in at different times Dial, transfer, etc. 6. Reasons for rejection: The base station is busy, all communication channels are busy, all required channels are busy, the types are not matched, the protocol types are not matched, or all RF lines are busy. 475321 V. Description of the invention (75) 8. 6. 2. 7 Remind to receive the message When the master device receives j JI 菝 message to the slave device *--one * " '一' · " ----- A ~ —— -—— setting, so that the controlled device side continues the subsequent procedures. The following information is included in the message: ~~ —-—--——--- —---__ Included in this message: 1. The identification code of the security password. 2. Terminal ID of the sender. 3. The recipient's terminal identification code. 4. Scope of control: reminds to receive instructions. 5. Sending range: (a) Format type: call establishment, (b) communication channel number, (c) call style: dial-in from outside, dial-in from outside, extension / call, use of special functions, plug-in, transfer Then wait. 6. Reasons for rejection: The base station is busy, all communication channels are busy, all required channels are busy, the types do not match, the protocol types do not match, or all RF lines are busy. 8. 6. 2. 8 Connection message This message is sent by the controlled device to notify the master device that the device has been sent-^ ---------- ^^ __—, the information received will be passed to the base ^ ^ Mobile). At the controlled end, he mentioned the main control device, and used the test. The following information is included in the message: 1. The identification code of the security password. 2. Terminal ID of the sender.

第78頁 475321 五、發明說明(76) 3 ·接收者的終端識別碼 4·控制範圍··連接指令。 5· 發信範圍·· (a )格式型式:通話建立, (b) 通訊通道號碼, (c) 通話樣式··由外撥入、由 特別功能使用、插撥、轉接等等。撥出、内線/呼叫、 6·回絕理由··基地台忙線中、° 所有要求遥道忙線甲、型式不搭配、通訊通道忙線令、 所有的RF忙線中。 ° 賜疋型式不搭配、或 8 · 6 · 2 · 9連接確認訊息 該訊息係從主控奘署山、、 - 形提供 1 ·女全费螞的識別碼 2·傳送者的終端識別碼。 3·接收者的終端識別碼。 4·控制範圍:連接確認指令。 5 ·發信範圍: (a) 格式型式:通話建立, (b) 通訊通道號碼, (C ) 通話樣式· - 特別功能使用、插撥=等由内撥出、内線/呼叫、 6.回絕理由:其认:接專專。 I地台忙線中、所有通訊通道忙線中、 第79頁 五、發明說明(77) ; = 線中…不搭配、協定型式不搭配、成 8 · 6 · 3保持連結與管理訊息 2买:賣I =要的訊息有傳輸功率控制、指定適應的通 道頻率、頻率偏移調整、多工切換(s—多工/τ一多工)、識 碼f 2 °旬問。所有訊息需遵循T-MUX格式以及第二層協 =。 件所指定的工作包含在發信範圍。該發信範圍定 義如下: 發信範圍規劃 位元7位元6位元5位; 位元3位元2位元1位元〇 格式型式=2 事件 -—___資料 $確保雙向通訊之正確性與有效性,系統必須週期性 地傳达及回應交握訊息。如8· 3與8· 4節所述,雙方必須交 換通訊狀態訊息及識別碼交握訊息,藉以偵測錯誤 ^ 錯誤。 尺正 •事件可以是功率準位(power 1 eve 1 )、加密/解密、頻 率通道偏移調整、資料錯誤、識別碼交握認可、或識別碼 交握失敗。這些資料為相當於事件的值。 8 · 6 · 4資訊構成部分Page 78 475321 V. Description of the invention (76) 3 · Recipient's terminal identification code 4 · Control range · · Connection instruction. 5 · Sending range · (a) Format type: call establishment, (b) communication channel number, (c) call style ·· Incoming from outside, used by special functions, plug-in, transfer, etc. Dial-out, extension / call, 6 · Rejection reasons ·· Base station busy, ° All required remote channel busy line A, type mismatch, communication channel busy order, all RF busy lines. ° The type is not matched, or the connection confirmation message of 8 · 6 · 2 · 9 This message is provided from the main control unit 奘-,--1 ID of the female full charge 2 · Terminal ID of the sender. 3. The recipient's terminal identification code. 4 · Control range: Connection confirmation command. 5 · Sending range: (a) Format type: call establishment, (b) communication channel number, (C) call style ·-special function use, dial-in = etc. from inside dial-in, extension / call, 6. reason for rejection : Its recognition: then specialize. I The platform is busy, all communication channels are busy, page 79 V. Description of the invention (77); = On-line ... mismatch, agreement type mismatch, 8 · 6 · 3 keep connected and manage information 2 buy : Sell I = The required information includes transmission power control, specified adaptive channel frequency, frequency offset adjustment, multiplexing switching (s—multiplexing / τ-multiplexing), and identification code f 2 °. All messages must follow the T-MUX format and the second layer protocol =. The work specified in this document is included in the scope of the letter. The definition of the transmission range is as follows: The transmission range is planned to be 7 bits, 6 bits, and 5 bits; 3 bits, 2 bits, and 1 bit. And effectiveness, the system must communicate and respond to handshake messages periodically. As described in Sections 8.3 and 8.4, both parties must exchange communication status messages and identification code handshake messages to detect errors ^ Errors. Ruler • The event can be power level (power 1 eve 1), encryption / decryption, frequency channel offset adjustment, data error, identification code handshake approval, or identification code handshake failure. These data are equivalent to events. 8 · 6 · 4 Information Components

第80頁 475321Page 475321

五、發明說明(78) f通話?監督中、,一些通話相關的資訊必須在呼 之間父換。這些資訊被附加在發信範圍中。 需以多重資料框傳送完整的資訊。特殊功能存:要=連 τ结皿釋格放: 及及第完整二” ^ ^ T - MUX格式及第二層協定。發信範圍之定義如下。 發信範圍規劃 位元7-位元6位元5位元4 格式型式=3 通話事件V. Description of the invention (78) f call? During supervision, some call-related information must be changed between calls. This information is attached to the scope of the letter. Complete information needs to be sent in multiple data frames. Special function storage: To be equal to τ 皿 释: and and complete the second "^ ^ T-MUX format and the second layer agreement. The definition of the transmission range is as follows. The transmission range planning bit 7-bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Format type = 3 Call event

通話事件可為啟動呼叫跟隨、起動呼叫轉接 撥交換(swap)、啟動插撥、漫遊、免持聽筒、三方 插 呼叫會議、接⑯、切斷連接、釋放、以及完全釋放等;該 資料為表4叫事件之數值、特殊功能存取碼或是功能存 取碼。 τ 8·7頻率通道錯誤偵測 除了 = 體亦可執 時器的識別碼交握。識別碼被週期性傳送。若在& 二 時間内錯過識別碼’資料傳輸將視為不正 位⑴關,需重複指令來確認資料遺失情形/若需控要制更棚 咼的正確性,亦可在未來實施CRC。對於發信攔位The call event can be call initiation, call initiation, swap, call initiation, roaming, speakerphone, three-way call conference, connection, disconnection, release, and complete release. The information is: Table 4 is called event value, special function access code or function access code. τ 8 · 7 frequency channel error detection In addition to = the body can also perform the handshake of the identification code of the timer. The identification code is transmitted periodically. If you miss the identification code ’data transmission within & within two hours, it will be regarded as an improper pass. You need to repeat the instructions to confirm the data loss situation. If you need to control the correctness of the frame, you can also implement CRC in the future. For letter blocking

第81頁 475321 五、發明說明(79) (FIELD),使用序列數值、事件、呼叫形式、以及呼叫狀 態來確保呼叫進行的轉移。在雙向通訊斯間,主控裝置端 (masterterminal)會自動產生RX與TX插斷。相反地,在 受控裝置端(slave terminal )的RX與TX插斷則由侦測單一 字元進行直接或間接的觸發。換句話說,主控裝置端不兩 偵測單一字元即可產±RX與^插斷,而從裝置可能不會^ 4ms間隔週期性地收到正確資料。這些情形的結果不 到正確的資料。若其中一個情形發生,ID_〇K的訊息將不 會被收到,且會偵測到脫離連結的情形。 8.8頻率通道錯誤修正 之 LED不來論止何 、、口 、月幵^/持、.、貝太久而超過Th 1 〇 s t計時器,例如^ 該連結將會被移除。在移除該連結之前時;二5秒找 :他通道並轉移該通訊至所找到的通道。 ί行二:需使用者下達任何指♦。在偵測。;:動 時,糸^會送出安靜的語音來取代擁擠的語音。、,· 8· 9自動通道掃描 之雜.ίίί期:曰:J =統 給~知作會明白的顯示 8· 10電話呼叫功能與特徵Page 81 475321 5. Description of the Invention (79) (FIELD) uses sequence values, events, call patterns, and call states to ensure the transfer of calls. Between two-way communication, the master terminal will automatically generate RX and TX interrupts. In contrast, the RX and TX interrupts at the slave terminal are triggered directly or indirectly by detecting a single character. In other words, the master device can generate ± RX and ^ interruption without detecting a single character, while the slave device may not receive the correct data periodically at 4ms intervals. The results of these situations are not correct. If one of these situations occurs, the ID_〇K message will not be received and a disconnection situation will be detected. 8.8 Frequency Channel Error Correction LED does not stop talking about,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,:::::: :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: Before removing the link; two 5 seconds to find: other channels and transfer the communication to the channel found. Line two: Any instructions from users are required. Detecting. ;: When moving, 糸 ^ will send a quiet voice to replace the crowded voice. 、、 · 9 9 Automatic Channel Scanning Miscellaneous. Ίίί Period: J: Tong Jiong ~ Zhi Zuo will understand the display 8 · 10 telephone call functions and features

475321 五、發明說明(80) "- 第二層協疋執彳于通話転序之指令與事件。所有的指令 與事件皆經由T-Mux封包(packet)之發信通道傳送。多個 連接之T-Mux封包的信號範圍被合併成資訊元件控制字 組。利用該等指令與事件,呼叫處理軟體可提供使用者所 初設之特徵。該系統可處理標準與超標準之功能與特徵。 通常會有兩種電話要求(phone request),即電話啤叫 (phone call)與程式通話(programming)。 電話呼叫之電話要求涉及兩個或更多使用者。因此, 必須建立提供使用者之間的通訊之連結。若所參與的使用 者係使用手機,則通訊連結為無線電頻率通道。假如這些 參與者之中的一個是遠端的使用者,則利用公共交換式電 話網路進行額外的通訊連線是需要的。在前述情況後,系 統必須進行通話設定的過程及連線的管理。通話的類別例 如是:外線撥入、内線撥出、開始内線通話、内線電話結 束、自動插撥、轉接、保留、最後一組號碼重撥、及使用 内建目錄的快速撥號。 程式編輯的通話請求只能夠有一個使用者參與,也就 是說此終端裝置是使用者要去進行程式設定。因此,在這 個時候不需要通訊連線,而終端裝置也允許使用者去修改 他(她)自己的資料庫。前述資料庫包括了安全密碼的識別 ,、終端裝置識別碼·、及快速撥號的索引與電話號碼_。因 為系統參數對於所有的終端裝置而言都是唯一的,,所以具 有允許使用者去註冊、修改及驗證資料庫的程式編輯的能 力°在前述當中有一個特別重要的特徵,那就是安倉密碼475321 V. Description of the Invention (80) "-The second layer of the protocol is directed to the instructions and events of the call sequence. All commands and events are transmitted through the T-Mux packet transmission channel. The signal ranges of multiple connected T-Mux packets are combined into an information element control block. Using these commands and events, the call processing software can provide the user-defined features. The system can handle standard and super standard functions and features. There are usually two types of phone requests, namely phone call and programming. Telephone requirements for telephone calls involve two or more users. Therefore, links must be established to provide communication between users. If the participating users are using mobile phones, the communication link is a radio frequency channel. If one of these participants is a remote user, an additional communication connection using a public switched telephone network is required. After the foregoing, the system must perform the call setup process and connection management. The types of calls are, for example: outside dial-in, internal dial-out, start of internal call, end of internal call, automatic dialing, transfer, hold, redial of the last group number, and speed dial using the built-in directory. Only one user can participate in the call request of the program editor, that is to say, this terminal device is the user who wants to set the program. Therefore, no communication connection is required at this time, and the terminal device also allows the user to modify his or her own database. The aforementioned database includes the identification of the security password, the identification code of the terminal device, and the index and telephone number of the speed dial. Because the system parameters are unique to all terminal devices, they have the ability to allow users to register, modify, and verify the program editing of the database. One of the aforementioned features is the security password.

第83頁 五、發明說明(81) ϊ 對於所有的終端裝置來說都必須是相同的,而且 別巧i二,:η:疋在同一個系統中。基地台的終端裝置識 圍5夂疋在〇〇到11間的範圍,且每-隻手機識別碼的範 ::在"到99之間。對於每一個終端裝置而言,可= 碣每Ϊ撥號之電話號碼,且前述快速撥號之電話號 馬母組最大可以有1 6位數。 8 · 11通話處 / 呼叫一通 社。内線/啤' 只有終端裝置自己’所以不需要頻道連 ;裝置間兩要一1話必須佔用兩個終端裝置,在這兩個終 A 而 固頻道以提供通訊使用,但是不需要盘公 網路(PSTN)進行通訊。議綱=的 ΐ之通訊中,從主控裝置端到受控裝置 定外,這此步驟方塊圖,除了額外增加一些協 通話兩種戶;::圖12。至於外線撥入通話及内線撥出 道來提供通訊:用m手機與基地台間需要一個頻 也需要-通道作A、g在基地台與公共交換之電話網路間 基地台是㈣主使用。在外線撥人通話的情況中, 置的角色。在端的角色,而手機則是扮演受控裝 置端的角&,2出通話的情況中’手機是扮演主控裝 而基地台則是扮演受控裝置端的角色。 ;夕線撥入通話(i/c)及内線撥出通話(ο/e)兩種模Page 83 V. Description of the invention (81) 必须 Must be the same for all terminal devices, and by the way i :: η: 疋 is in the same system. The terminal device identification of the base station ranges from 0 to 11 and the range of the identification code of each mobile phone is between " and 99. For each terminal device, the number of dialed telephone numbers can be 碣, and the telephone number of the aforementioned speed dial number can be a maximum of 16 digits. 8 · 11 call office / call a news agency. Extension / Beer 'only the terminal device itself', so no channel connection is required; between two devices one to one words must occupy two terminal devices, in these two terminal A and fixed channels to provide communication, but no public network is required (PSTN) for communication. In the communication of the platform = ΐ, from the main control device to the controlled device, the block diagram of this step, in addition to adding some additional two types of cooperative calls; :: Figure 12. As for the outside dial-in call and the inside dial-out channel to provide communication: a frequency is needed between the m mobile phone and the base station-channel A, g is used between the base station and the public switched telephone network. The base station is the main use. In the case of an outside caller, the role is set. On the other hand, the mobile phone acts as the corner of the controlled device. In the case of two outgoing calls, the mobile phone acts as the master device and the base station plays the role of the controlled device. ; Evening line incoming call (i / c) and internal line outgoing call (ο / e)

第84頁 475321 五、發明說明(82) 式基地台疋與手機及公共交換之電話網路兩者共同工 作也就疋說二者是在來源配對及終端配對兩種方式來 運作。因此,在通話過程中會有兩組的傳送狀態。'下來 8 · 11 · 2通話起始源 如圖5 = i二 電話網路間的設定,其運作方式 不相從每一個起始源終端裝置所撥出的外線電 話疋不相同的,例如從其从Α 的。圖m來自年::Λ 是從手機撥出是不相同 湃)所敘ϋ、μ β π,的起始源)及圖19(來自基地台的起始 /原)所敘述的疋外線通話的操作方式。 8 · 11 · 這些 線/呼叫通話不涉及公丑 4似的,唯一的不同點是内 的是這些通話的操作順序換之電話網路。_中所描述 8 · 11 · 4清除操作 依照不同的斷訊情況合 有部分的清除處理方式數種不同的清除處理方式。 理方式則只有涉及通話的兩方有關連,其餘的處 如下。 的,、中一方。這些情況將詳列 i · :这彻比、 有一方將電話掛斷。這種13产开//兄是發生在兩方通話期間 偵測到上述的掛斷動作時7形可視為一般的斷訊狀況,當 的動作。假如這是發峰.二掛斷的這端將會開始通話清除 '生在外線通話的情況,不是掛斷這方Page 84 475321 V. Description of the invention (82) The base station works with mobile phones and public switched telephone networks. That is to say, the two operate in source pairing and terminal pairing modes. Therefore, there are two sets of transmission states during the call. 'Down 8 · 11 · 2 call start source as shown in Figure 5 = i two telephone network settings, the operation mode is not the same as the outside line dialed from each start source terminal device, such as from It's from A. Figure m is from the year :: Λ is different from dialing out from a mobile phone. 湃), the origin of β, μ β π, and the outside call as described in Figure 19 (from the base station's original / origin). Operation method. 8 · 11 · These lines / calls do not involve public ugliness. The only difference is that the operation sequence of these calls is changed to the telephone network. Described in _ 8 · 11 · 4 Clearing operations There are several different clearing processing modes in total according to different interruption situations. Only two parties involved in the call are connected, and the rest are as follows. Yes, China. These situations will be detailed i: This is a complete comparison, one party hung up the phone. This 13-on // brother occurs when the above-mentioned hang-up action is detected during a two-party conversation. The 7-shape can be regarded as a general interruption situation. If this is a peak, the end of the second hang up will start to clear the call.

第85頁 475321Page 475 321

、1 =、x置就是公共交換之電話網路將會成為初始端,初 始鈿必須掌控的斷訊工作項目有:斷訊通話通路、使 C(|DEC無效、釋放頻率通道、使傳送及接收無效、及返回 狀態。對於受控裝置^,其初始的狀態是在睡眠狀 怎,對於主控裝置端的初始狀態則是重撥電話聲。 • :這個狀況出現可視為斷訊 過IΪ表示雖然通訊頻道已經建立,但是通話通路還沒 有Λ定成。斷訊的工作包括有:釋放頻率通道、 及接收無效、及返回到初始狀態。 、 3, :這個狀況出現表示通訊連 線建立失敗。必須完成的斷訊工作有:撤離.連線狀熊、 放頻率通道、及返回到初始狀態。 “ 4·識^這個狀況出現表示在通話期 間,其識別碼交握過程失敗。聲音資料也和控制資料一 都不再有效。必須完成的斷訊工作有··撤離連線狀熊德 放頻率通道、使傳送及接收無效、在主控裝置端重^釋 =通話通路一樣的連線狀態、在受控裝置端返回到初始2 別的終端裝置。在這個狀況中不需要釋放通話通路^個 連線·。假如在電話掛斷的情形下,仍然保持話筒打^,訊 入睡眠的狀態,則返回到初始狀態並等待通話要求汗或進 當通話迴路變成開迴路時,可以偵測到在基地台與八 換之電話網路間出現了斷訊,換句話說,話簡=么共交 e N Ci經被掛, 1 = , x set is the public exchange telephone network will become the initial end. The initial interruption work items that must be controlled are: interruption call path, invalidate C (| DEC, release frequency channel, enable transmission and reception. Invalid and return status. For the controlled device ^, its initial state is in the sleep state, and for the initial state of the master device, it is a redial call sound. •: This condition can be regarded as a break. IΪ means that although the communication The channel has been established, but the communication channel has not yet been established. The interruption work includes: releasing the frequency channel, and receiving is invalid, and returning to the original state. 3,: This condition indicates that the communication connection establishment failed. Must be completed The interruption work includes: evacuation. Connected bears, release frequency channels, and return to the initial state. "4. Recognition ^ This condition indicates that during the call, the identification code handshake process failed. The sound data and control data All of them are no longer valid. The interruption work that must be completed is to evacuate the connected bearer to release the frequency channel, invalidate transmission and reception, and re-execute at the master control device. The connection state is the same as the channel, and returns to the original 2 other terminal device at the controlled device side. In this situation, there is no need to release the call path ^ connection ·. If the phone hangs up, keep the microphone on ^ When the signal enters the sleep state, it returns to the initial state and waits for the call request to sweat or enter. When the call loop becomes open loop, it can be detected that a discontinuity has occurred between the base station and the eight-switch telephone network, in other words , Jane = Mody pay e N Ci Suspended

I °在兩個終端裝w 否來決定。假如發夺i斷訊與否是藉由偵測話筒掛上與 終端裝置間的通訊诵ί訊情形,除了說話通道外,在兩個 斷訊的通話清除摔作i頻道)將會被清除,這是符合通話 及内出有的内線通話、外線撥入電話 通話f宕湘^ Γ對於在連線設定期間失敗(情況3)及在 的。二於^ Β失敗(情況2 ),只有連線狀態是必須被清除 * ;在功能/程式存取完成時斷訊時,說話通道與通 讯通道兩者都不需要被清除。 9 ·系統設定 ^有部分的系統設定條件是利用軔體程式預先撰寫好設 疋,而直接順序式展佈頻譜數據機也是相同的方式。在不 =的軔體程式版本中會有不同的系統參數設定值,其餘的 多數設定可以藉由使用者最常使用的優先順序,讓使用者 自己進行程式編輯。 較佳放置於軔體與數據機中之程式編輯的系统設定值 包括有下列的參數: “ ” α 1 ·直接順序控制的内建表 2.選擇器向量 3· ΡΝ 碼 4. 唯一的字元 5. 設定資訊位元 6. 測試位元 7 · 狀態的各個細項_I ° Install w at both terminals to determine. If the message is disconnected or not, the communication between the microphone and the terminal device is detected. In addition to the speaking channel, the call will be cleared to the i channel in the two interrupted calls.) This is in accordance with the internal call, outgoing intercom call, and external incoming call call. 对于 对于 For failure during the connection setting (case 3), and in. Two ^ Β failed (case 2), only the connection status must be cleared *; when the function / program access is completed, both the speaking channel and the communication channel need not be cleared. 9 · System settings ^ Some of the system setting conditions are that the settings are written in advance using a body program, and the direct spread spectrum data generator is the same way. There are different system parameter setting values in the non- = body program version. Most of the remaining settings can be edited by the user according to the most commonly used priority order. The system settings for program editing, preferably placed in the carcass and the modem, include the following parameters: "" α 1 · Built-in table for direct sequence control 2. Selector vector 3. PN code 4. Unique character 5. Set the information bit 6. Test bit 7 · Status details _

發明說明(85) 功率分界值 功率位準 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 數值控制振盪器偏移值 音調、蜂鳴器調整值 時序 外部中斷 加碼/解碼 按鍵的定義 發光二極體顯示代表 較佳由使用者進行程式編輯的參數 1 ·安全密碼的識別碼 是:Description of the invention (85) Power cut-off value Power level 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Numerical control oscillator offset value tone, buzzer adjustment value timing external interrupt coding / decoding button definition Light-emitting diode display represents better by Parameters for program editing by the user1. The identification code of the security password is:

終端裝置識別碼 4 對設定,以作為分辨 撥出電話的起始源 快速撥號的索引及電話號石 在基地台與手機間的邏輯力 外線撥入的振鈴聲及/或是從基地< 5·自動撥號 10. 0系統安裝 使用本發明之展佈頻譜頻率的至少一個優點是:可以 在同二設定多個基地台與多個手機組。在這裡 群組6和基地 台一樣都是所定義的終端裝置,同時這些終端裝置是 相同的安全識別碼來註冊。内線通話只能夠使用相同雜 中的終端裝置來建立通話。同樣地,外線撥入或内線、、、且 的通話必須經由相同群組中的基地台。除了系統的安=出Terminal device identification code 4 pairs set as the index to distinguish the speed dial of the starting source of the outgoing call and the ringtone of the phone number stone between the base station and the mobile phone. · At least one advantage of the automatic dialing 1.0 system installation using the spread spectrum frequency of the present invention is that multiple base stations and multiple mobile phone groups can be set in the same two. Here, group 6 is the same terminal device as the base station, and these terminal devices are registered with the same security identification code. Intercom calls can only be made using the same miscellaneous terminal device. Similarly, calls from outside lines or inside lines must be through base stations in the same group. In addition to the safety of the system = out

第88頁 五、發明說明(86) 別瑪之外,每一個終端装置都有他自 別碼。-般而言’因為只有12個頻道是可 2裝!識 在同-個群組中最多可以同時設定12個基地台。理於上以 限制的,但是考慮到系統可以同;處理 == 立ί 組。較佳伽 -組2位數的號碼,其中。。到n 'V终端裝置識別碼是 用,1剛則是保留給中; 終端裝置有-預設的系統識別碼"〇" 使用之終端裝置識別碼的預設值是"0",對於每fft口 終端裝置識別碼的預設值是,,丨2"。 必須被協調及註冊;否則,多個基地台將會出現的且識别碼 識別碼的預設值…會演變门成 前述^終端裝置的識別碼是儲存在不可揮發性的記憶 ::當J生電源耗盡後,例如更換為新的電池,這: 碼並不而要進行再次登錄。如n.U中所描述;= 可:f據需要來進行更換或修改終端裝置的識別碼 避免未經許可的手機經由基地台來進行坎 為了 實施例中建議使用者在初次購買後,變;;系統安3佳 為不同於預設值的號碼。 識別碼 11 · 〇程式編輯 為了讓使用者方便使用,本發明之系統提供儲存最常 475321 發明說明(87) 使用之資料的功能。這些資料包括安全密碼識別碼、終端 f置識別碼、緊急中斷插撥電話薄的號碼、撥入電話之鈐 聲,…順序私定轉接號碼、及快速撥電話號碼。本發明 之系、洗亦提供簡單及使用者友善的操作方式,以方便使用 ^進行註冊、、變更、及驗證這m程式編輯的功能及 攻些貝料相關的存取碼如下列所示。以下各段章節所描述 的疋這些功成一步一步操作的順序。 "20"-登錄/變更自動撥號的號碼 "2 Γ -驗證自動撥號的號碼 ’’ 30” -登錄/變更撥入電話之鈴聲辨認表 "3 Γ -驗證撥入之鈴聲辨認 "40" -登錄/變更指定轉接號碼 41 -驗證指定轉接號碼 5己憶5 〇 ” —登錄/變更快速撥號之索引及號碼 驗證快速撥號之索引及號碼 ,· 6 0 ” _變更安全識別碼為預設值"〇,, ,’61"_變更全部的安全識別碼 "6 2變更個別的安全識別碼 "6 3π -驗證個別的安全識別碼 "64"-變更終端裝置識別碼 ’ Τ 65" _驗證終端裝置識別碼 11 · 1編輯系統的安全識別碼 就像是第十節中所描述一樣,使用者可 同於預設值的系統安全識別瑪。提供的击 、w功能的兩假理Page 88 V. Description of the invention (86) Except for Bema, every terminal device has its own unique code. -Generally speaking, because only 12 channels are available 2 packs! You can set up to 12 base stations in the same group at the same time. The reason is limited, but considering that the systems can be the same; processing == 立 ί group. Better Gamma-group of 2 digit numbers, among them. . To n 'V, the terminal device identification code is used, and 1 is reserved for use; the terminal device has a preset system identification code " 〇 " The default value of the terminal device identification code used is " 0 ", For each fft port, the preset value of the terminal device identification code is, 2 ". Must be coordinated and registered; otherwise, multiple base stations will appear and the default value of the identification code ... will evolve into the aforementioned ^ The identification code of the terminal device is stored in non-volatile memory :: When J 生After the power is exhausted, such as replacing with a new battery, this: the code does not have to be logged in again. As described in nU; = Yes: f. Replace or modify the identification code of the terminal device as needed to prevent unauthorized mobile phones from passing through the base station. In the example, it is recommended that the user change after the initial purchase; System An 3 is a number different from the preset value. Identification code 11 · 〇 Program editing For the convenience of users, the system of the present invention provides the function of storing the most commonly used data of 475321 invention description (87). This information includes the security code identification code, the terminal identification code, the number of the emergency interruption dialing phone book, the beep of the incoming call, ... the orderly private transfer number, and the speed dial phone number. The system of the present invention also provides a simple and user-friendly operation mode to facilitate the use of registration, modification, and verification functions of the m program editing and access codes related to the shellfish as shown below. These functions are described in the following paragraphs in a step-by-step sequence. " 20 " -login / change auto-dial number " 2 Γ -verify auto-dial number `` 30 "-login / change dial-in call ring tone recognition table " 3 Γ-verify dial-in ring tone recognition " 40 "-Register / change the designated forwarding number 41-Verify the designated forwarding number 5 Jiyi 5 〇 "—Login / Change the speed dial index and number verification Speed dial index and number, · 6 0” _Change security identification code For the default values ",", "61" "Change all security identifiers" 6 2 Change individual security identifiers "6 3π-Verify individual security identifiers" 64 "-Change terminal device identification Code Τ 65 " _Verification terminal device identification code 11 · 1 The security identification code of the editing system is as described in Section 10. The user can identify the system security identification mark with the preset value. Two hypotheses of function

第90頁 475321 五、發明說明(88) 有二:第一、可以避免系統被不正常的盜用,第二、儘可 能避免另一群組使用相同之預設的系統安全識別碼及設定 重覆的終端裝置識別碼。本發明已經提供了 一個容易並具 彈性化的機構以作為變更及(或)驗證安全識別碼。因為在 相同群組中的所有終端裝置會共同使用相同的系統安全識 別碼’所以一旦使用者決定變更系統的安全識別碼,則所 有的終端裝置也必須跟著變更。由於一終端裝置無法與另 一個不同之系統安全識別碼的終端裝置進行通話,因此, 安全識別碼就像是使用終端裝置前的密碼輸入一樣,所以 安全識別碼必須被記憶下來。有三種程式編輯的方式允許 「' 使用者操作他們的安全識別碼:第一、設定安全識別碼為 預没值"Ο π ;第二、變更全部終端裝置的安全識別碼; 第一、變更個別的安全識別碼。此外,還有一個指令可以 驗證所註冊的安全識別碼。下面的章節將會詳細描述這些 操作順序。 11 · 1 · 1變更系統的安全識別碼為預設值 預設的安全識別碼為"0 ”,這個預設值可以讓使用者 在購買這電話系統後進行正常的通話。使用者可以在他們 熟悉這電話特性後再進行變更他們的安全識別碼。當使用 者變更了他們的系統安全識別碼之後,有可能舍亡 密瑪内容,在這個情況下,.因為新的終端裝 系統安全識別碼,所以使用者無法安裝新的終端裝置。這 凊/兄的個快速且谷易的補救措施是:將系統的安全識別 碼設定回原來的預設值。無論如何,由於新的安全識別碼Page 90 475321 V. Description of the invention (88) There are two: first, to prevent the system from being misused abnormally, and second, to avoid another group using the same preset system security identifier and setting duplication as much as possible Terminal device identification number. The present invention has provided an easy and flexible mechanism for changing and / or verifying the security identification code. Because all terminal devices in the same group will use the same system security ID ', once the user decides to change the system's security ID, all terminal devices must also be changed accordingly. Since a terminal device cannot communicate with a terminal device with a different system security identification code, the security identification code is like the password input before the terminal device, so the security identification code must be memorized. There are three ways of program editing to allow "'users to operate their security identification code: first, set the security identification code to a pre-empted value" "0 π; second, change the security identification code of all terminal devices; first, change Individual security ID. In addition, there is a command to verify the registered security ID. The following sections will describe these operations in detail. 11 · 1 · 1 Change the system's security ID to a preset value. The security identification code is "0". This default value allows users to make normal calls after purchasing the phone system. Users can change their security identification code after they become familiar with this phone feature. When the user changes their system security identification code, it may be possible to cede the Mima content. In this case, because the new terminal is installed with the system security identification code, the user cannot install a new terminal device. A quick and easy remedy for this guy is to set the system's security ID back to its original default value. Anyway, thanks to the new security ID

第91頁 475321 五、發明說明(89) 已經是回到預設值,所以直仙少 須回到預設值。下列是執;這“二;:終端裝置都必 1 ·打開按鍵蓋並聽到撥號聲燮、、 2 ·按下π記憶”鍵 曰 3 ·鍵入編輯程式代碼丨丨G η " 4.按下"記憶"鍵,安二程式編輯聲響 "〇,丨。 女王識別碼便會設定為預設值 11·1·2變更全部終端奘番 ^ - 、鲕表置的安全識別碼 糸統提供-個可以快速變 安全識別碼的捷徑。這侗接^ 〇文衣灸終鈿裒罝町 绝個捷徑的較佳操作人員是蕤由一位 已被授權的個人來進行,固拄 作介人貝疋猎由伍 Η ·折古弓要 寺’此捷徑的較佳操作方式 疋·所有閒置的終端裝詈fk … ^ ^, ^ ^ χ 置(匕括手機及基地台)接收一個廣 播和5 ’此廣播4日令内空S傲 別π,/變更安全識別碼為新的安全識 2 ^ ^匕程中,所有其他終端裝置的使用者都可 ^見Ϊ更過程。但是’那些忙線中的終端裝i、正在使 、沒有電力、或是超過控制範圍的終端裝置是無法變 ^為新的安全識別碼。對於操作變更密碼之被授權的人 ,進订確認所有已安裝之終端裝置是否已經完成變更新 的安全識別碼是絕對必要的。假如未完全完成變更,則可 =再進行一次變更操作,或是對於這樣未完成變更的終端 =置貝轭其他可以進行個別變更的指令。下列是廣泛實施 隻更安全識別碼的順序。 1 ·打開按鍵蓋並聽到撥號聲響 2·按下’’記憶”鍵Page 91 475321 V. Description of the invention (89) has returned to the preset value, so Zhixian need not return to the preset value. The following is the implementation; the "two ;: the terminal device must be 1 · Open the key cover and hear the dial tone 、, 2 · Press the π memory" key said 3 · Enter the editing program code 丨 丨 G η " 4. Press " Memory " key, An Er program editing sound " 〇, 丨. The queen identification code will be set to the default value. 11 · 1 · 2 Change all terminals ^-, the security identification code set by the oolitic system. The system provides a shortcut that can quickly change the security identification code. This is a short cut. ^ The best operator of Wenyi Moxibustion Terminal is a person who has been authorized to do it. It is used as an introduction by Bei Yi. Temple's better operation method of this shortcut 疋 · All idle terminal equipment fk… ^ ^, ^ ^ χ Set up (including mobile phone and base station) to receive a broadcast and 5 'This broadcast will make the space empty for 4 days π, / Change the security identification code to the new security identification 2 ^ ^ In the process, all users of other terminal devices can see the change process. However, terminal devices that are busy, are currently using, have no power, or are beyond the control range of terminal devices cannot be changed to new security identification codes. For authorized persons who operate the password change, it is absolutely necessary to order a security identification code to confirm whether all installed terminal devices have been changed. If the change is not completely completed, you can = make another change operation, or for the terminal of such incomplete change = set other instructions that can make individual changes. The following is a sequence of widely implemented only more secure identifiers. 1 · Open the key cover and hear the dial sound 2 · Press the ‘Memory’ key

475321^ 發明說明(90) 、、3·鍵入編輯程式代碼"61"並聽到程式編輯聲響,前 述之聲響是一聲短的"。畢”聲 4 ·鍵入系統的安全識別碼,最多為丨〇位數 5 ·再一次聽到程式編輯聲響 6 ·再一次鍵入相同的系統安全識別碼 7·按下"記憶,,鍵 8·假如這些鍵入的號碼與第一次鍵入的號碼吻合, 別碼^ Γ已確認之兩短聲的’’喝’’音’新的系統安全識 丘…、70成。這時使用者會再一次聽到撥號聲響,且 可以進行其他的操作。 ,9 ·假如這些鍵入的號碼不吻合 • ΠΠ 乂 · π 《V观巧个π令、,只 曰 同日守系統安全識別碼不會被變更 #用1 ·3個別的變更系統安全識別碼 更功处1χ隻更個別終端裝置的系統安全識別碼。這種變 例如家庭、辦: “吏用者想要加入其他群組時, 碼為-新的丰:ί 使用者必須變更系統安全識別 "變更全部故迪:全識別碼。這功能的正確操作方式如同 碼是|,62" 置的安全識別碼"一 I ’不過其程式編輯 、1 · 4驗證系統安全識別碼 ^ ^ ;系統安全識別碼是使用者戶/M?掊n # 然後使用者士处餘丄t 4,疋1文w有所忑隐正確的, j 才此藉由下列的順序來進行驗證。 •打開按鍵蓋並聽到撥號聲響 2·按下,’記憶”鍵475321 ^ Description of the invention (90), 3. Type the editing program code " 61 " and hear the program editing sound, the aforementioned sound is a short ". "Beep" 4 Enter the security identification code of the system, up to digits of 5 digits 5 · Once again, hear the program editing sound 6 · Enter the same security identification code of the system again 7 · Press " memory, key 8 · If These entered numbers are the same as those entered for the first time, do n’t code ^ Γ has confirmed two short "drink" tones, the new system security awareness ..., 70%. At this time, the user will hear the dialing again Sound, and other operations can be performed., 9 · If these entered numbers do not match • ΠΠ 乂 · π "V Guanqiao a π order, only the same-day guard system security identification code will not be changed # 用 1 · 3 Individual changes to the system security ID are more effective. Only 1 × only the system security ID of the individual terminal device. Such a change, for example, family, office: "When users want to join other groups, the code is -new Feng: ί The user must change the system security identification " Change all reason: full identification code. The correct way of operating this function is as if the code is |, the security identification code set by "I", but its program editing, 1 · 4 verification system security identification code ^ ^; the system security identification code is the user household / M?掊 n # Then the user's office 丄 t 4, and the text 1 is somewhat vaguely correct, and j verifies it in the following order. • Open the key cover and hear the dial tone 2 · Press, the 'Memory' key

第93頁 475321 五、發明說明(91) 3.鍵入編輯程式代碼"61" 述之聲響是-聲短的聲響,前 鍵入系統的安全識別碼,最多為丨〇位 入| ^如這些鍵入的號碼與儲存在記憶體中的於碼吻 合,會聽到表示已確認之兩短聲的"。畢"立中的被碼勿 :完成。$時使用者會再-次聽到撥號聲響:且Π已 其他的操作。 且可以進仃 吻合6,·則用這入Λ號碼與儲存在記憶體令的號碼不 、】使用者會&到重新鍵人聲響,他(她) 話並再一次嘗試操作。 貝掛上1: 11 · 2編輯終端袭置識別碼 除了如第十節中所描述之在安梦湘 外,使用者也可以變更戍驗=登錄註冊操作 H 個終知裝置都有他自己的二位數識別碼。基地 :的:別碼是在。。到"的範圍中’而手機的識別碼是從12 範圍。基地台終端裝置的預設識別碼是"〇" ,^裝置的預設識別碼是"12"。這些識別碼都必須是唯 :的膝:如有兩個或更多個終端裝置都是註冊相 :安發生不可預期的結果。因此,假如在同一個群組 裝夕個終端裝置時,本發明建議調整為同等的代理 杈佳,也就是說在相同的安全識別碼之下。 11 · 2 · 1變更終端裝置識別碼 依照下列的順序來進行變更終端裝置識別碼。 I 打開按鍵蓋並聽到撥號聲響Page 93 475321 V. Description of the invention (91) 3. Enter the editing program code "quote" 61. The sound described is-short sound, enter the system's security identification code before, up to 丨 0 digits | ^ If you type The number matches the Yu code stored in the memory. You will hear two short quotations " indicating confirmation. Complete " Li Zhong's bed code is not completed: complete. At $, the user will hear the dialing sound again: and other operations have been performed. And you can enter 6 to match, then use this Λ number and the number stored in the memory order, the user will & re-press the human voice, he (she) speaks and try the operation again. Began to attach 1: 11 · 2 Edit the terminal attack identification code. In addition to being described in An Mengxiang as described in Section 10, the user can also change the checksum = login and register operations. H devices have their own two. Digit identification code. Base: 's: Don't be here. . To " in the range ’and the phone ’s ID is in the range of 12. The preset identification code of the base station terminal device is " 〇 ", and the preset identification code of the device is " 12 ". These identification codes must be unique: if two or more terminal devices are registered, an unexpected result will occur. Therefore, if terminal devices are installed in the same group, the present invention proposes to adjust them to the same proxy, that is, under the same security identification code. 11 · 2 · 1 Changing the terminal device ID Follow the procedure below to change the terminal device ID. I open the key cover and hear a dial tone

475321 發明說明(92) 2 ·按下’’記憶”鍵 3·鍵入編輯程式代碼”64"並聽到程 述之聲響是一聲短的"嗶”冑 、廊铒卓響,别 4 ·鍵入2位數的終端裝置識別碼 5 ·再一次聽到程式編輯聲響 6 ·再一次鍵入相同的系統安全識別碼 則二假主如這些鍵入的號碼與第一次鍵入的號碼吻合, 2 = 3確認之兩短聲的"導”音’新的終端裝置諸 可以逸24時使用者會再一次聽到#號聲響,卫 J以進彳丁其他的操作。 8.假如這些鍵入的號碼不吻合,則會聽到重新 聲響,同時終端裝置識別碼不會被變更。 11 · 2 · 2驗證終端裝置識別碼 首先,確定終端裝置識別碼是使用者所記憶正確的, “、、後使用者才能藉由下列的順序來進行驗證。 1 ·打開按鍵蓋並聽到撥號聲響 2 ·按下"記憶'’鍵 3·鍵入編輯程式代碼"65"並聽到程式編輯聲響,前 述之聲響是一聲短的”嗶,,聲 4 ·鍵入2位數的終端裝置識別碼 人5 ·叙如這些鍵入的號碼與儲存在記憶體中的號碼吻 合,會聽到表示已確認之兩短聲的,,嗶”音。這時使用者會 再一次聽到撥號聲響,且可以進行其他的操作。 6 ·假如這些鍵入的號碼與儲存在記憶體中的號碼不475321 Description of the invention (92) 2 · Press the "memory" key 3 · Enter the editing program code "64" and hear the short sound of the program description "Beep" 胄, lang zhuo Zhuo ring, don't 4 · Enter 2 Number of terminal device identification code 5 · Program editing sound 6 is heard again. · Enter the same system security identification code again. If the numbers entered are consistent with the numbers entered for the first time, 2 = 3. The new terminal device "Sound" can be used at 24 o'clock. At 24 o'clock, the user will once again hear the # sound, and Wei will perform other operations. 8. If the numbers entered do not match, you will hear a resound and the terminal device identification code will not be changed. 11 · 2 · 2 Verify the terminal device identification code First, make sure that the terminal device identification code is memorized correctly by the user, ", and then the user can perform verification in the following order. 1 · Open the key cover and hear the dial sound 2 · Press the "Memory" button 3 · Enter the editing program code " 65 " and hear the program editing sound, the aforementioned sound is a short beep, sound 4 · Enter the 2-digit terminal device identification code Person 5 · If the number entered matches the number stored in the memory, you will hear two short beeps, "beep" sounds indicating confirmation. At this time, the user will hear the dial sound again, and can perform other 6. If the numbers entered are different from the numbers stored in the memory

第95頁 475321 五、發明說明(93) 吻合,則使用者會聽到重新鍵入聲 話並再一次嘗試操作。 上電 11 · 3編輯快速撥電話號碼 每一個ft台或手機的終端裝置,都能夠使用所館存 的編錄號碼來進行快速的撥出電話。使用者最多 = 20組最常:出的編錄號碼,每-個編錄號碼最多可以 位數,”使用從01聰的兩位數作為索引指*,例Γ 01、05、1、20等。使用者只需要按下"鍵及 依照索引所指不的’便能進行快速撥號通話 電話號碼可以增加、刪除、& _ 。 承5丨,、 將在稍後描述。 u及驗证°那些#作的順序 11· 3· 1註冊/變更快速撥電話號碼 個雷可以註冊2°組最常撥出的編錄號碼,每-個電洁j虎碼最多可以右〗β a奴 r 在#•德於入仿鞑ni ·λ ()可以選擇性的依照 的辨認,或是以"輸入號碼計時結束"的内部方式,j 終止時顯„入♦的全部位數。註冊的順序顯示如下: 丁汗按鍵蓋並聽到來自蜂鳴器的撥號聲響 按下MEMO鍵並聽到程式編輯聲(一短嗶聲) ,編輯程式代碼”50”,聽到確認聲(二短嗶聲)、 鍵入欲快速撥號之電話號碼 再一次按下MEMO鍵 $入二位數之快速撥號索引 叙如鍵入的號碼是有效的號碼,則隨著撥號聲之 475321 五、發明說明(94) 後會發出確認聲響,號碼已經被註冊或變更成功。這時使 用者可以進行其他的操作。 8 ·*假如鍵入的號碼是一個無效的號碼,則會聽到重 新鍵入聲響。此時,使用者可以選擇關上按鍵蓋並離開, 或是按下1’ Ta 1 k”鍵以重獲撥號聲響,及重新開始第二步驟 以後的順序。 11 使 瑪。當 如前述 認的聲 1 7 聲之後 y以進 8· 到重新 開,或 梦驟以 • 3 · 2驗證快速撥電話號碼 用者可以驗證任何已經註冊的快速撥號的電話號 他(她)進入到索引晝面並鍵入待驗證之號碼時,假 之鍵入號碼符合所註冊的號碼,使用者將會聽到確 響,否則會聽到重撥聲。驗證的順序顯示如下·· 打開按鍵蓋並聽到來自蜂鳴器的撥號聲響 按下MEMO鍵並聽到程式編輯聲(一短嗶聲) 鍵入編輯程式代碼” 51 ’’,聽到確認聲(二短嗶聲) 鍵入快速撥號之電話號碼 按下MEMO鍵 進入二位數之快速撥號索引 假如鍵入的號碼符合所註冊的號碼,則隨著撥號 會;出確認聲響’表示驗證動作成功。這時使用者 灯其他的操作動作。 ?鍵入的號碼是不同於所註冊的號碼,則會聽 θ接下/τ此時’使用者可以選擇蓋上按鍵蓋並離 ::::鍵以重獲播號聲響,及重新開始第二Page 95 475321 V. Description of the invention (93) If they match, the user will hear the re-type voice and try the operation again. Power on 11 · 3 Edit speed dial phone number Each ft station or mobile phone terminal device can use the catalog number stored in the library to make fast dial out calls. The maximum number of users = 20 sets of the most common: the number of the catalog, each catalog number can be a maximum of digits, "using two digits from 01 Satoshi as the index finger *, such as Γ 01, 05, 1, 20, etc. use You only need to press the "&" button and follow the index to indicate that you can make a speed dial call. The phone number can be added, deleted, & _. It will be described later. U and verification # 作 步骤 11 · 3 · 1 Register / change the speed dial phone number A Thunder can register the most frequently dialed catalog number of the 2 ° group, and each one of the electric cleaning j tiger codes can be up to the right〗 β a 奴 r in # • The imitation 鞑 ni · λ () can be selectively identified in accordance with the internal method of " entering the number and timing end ". When j is terminated, all digits of ♦ are displayed. The registration sequence is shown below: Ding Khan button cover and hear the dial sound from the buzzer Press the MEMO button and hear the program editing sound (one short beep), edit the program code "50", and hear the confirmation sound (two short beeps) ), Type the phone number you want to speed dial, press the MEMO key $ again to enter the two-digit speed dial index. If the number you entered is a valid number, then with the dial tone 475321 A confirmation sound is issued, and the number has been registered or changed successfully. At this time, the user can perform other operations. 8 · * If the number entered is an invalid number, you will hear a re-keying sound. At this time, the user can choose to close the key cover and leave, or press the 1 'Ta 1 k ”key to retrieve the dialing sound and restart the sequence after the second step. 11 Shima. When the sound as previously recognized After 1 7 beeps, enter 8 to reopen, or dream to • 3 · 2 to verify the speed dial phone number. The user can verify any registered speed dial phone number. He or she enters the index day and type When the number is to be verified, if the entered number matches the registered number, the user will hear a confirmation beep, otherwise they will hear a redial tone. The sequence of verification is shown below. · Open the key cover and hear the dial sound from the buzzer Press the MEMO button and hear the program editing sound (one short beep). Enter the editing program code "51" and hear the confirmation sound (two short beeps). Enter the speed dial phone number. Press the MEMO button to enter the two-digit speed dial. Index If the number entered matches the registered number, it will follow the dial-up meeting; if a confirmation sound is displayed, it means that the verification action is successful. At this time, the user lights other operations. ? The number entered is different from the registered number, then θ will be connected / τ At this time, the user can choose to close the key cover and leave the :::: key to re-broadcast the number and restart the second

第97頁 五、發明說明(95) Π · 4程式編輯外線撥人之振鈐列表 對於每一個基地台,使用者最多一 識別碼,以作為基地台預設之連線列表。::::: 撥入時,所連線的基地台將會振鈐, j f線電話 個手機亦相繼的會振鈴。假如列表中 預設的第一 狀態,基地台將會嘗試列表中的機是广線 手機也是忙線中,基地台將會嘗 假如第一個 三個手機是忙線中,則在基地假使所有 連線’只有基地台是與遠端的通 ^機間無法建立 的手機也將會連線。但是無論如何n,,列表對應 任何基地台的相對應關係。當從有從手機映對到 機會自動的從第一個基地台(置出外線電話時,手 —個基地台(終端1置識別碼^裝置識別碼"00")到最後 U.4」註冊/變更外線)進仃搜尋。 為了去註冊/變更映對 ,鈴列纟 鍵,然後依照,’存取碼”(3〇)、 使用者必須按下’’Memo,’ 數之11終端裝置識別馬,,按下。二位數之’’順序號碼π及二位 1·打開按鍵蓋並聽到來I式^輯的順序顯示如下: 2·按下MEMO鍵並聽蜂鳴器的撥號聲響 ,3·鍵入編輯程式以,編輯聲(-短,聲) 聲 4·鍵入一位數的 U ,聽到確認聲(二短嗶聲) 順序號嫣,然後聽到程式編輯 鍵入終端裝置的α 罝的一位數識別碼 5· 475321 五、發明說明(96) 6. 假如鍵入的號碼是一個有效的號碼,則隨著撥號 聲,後會發出確認聲響,表示號竭已經註冊/變更成功。 這時使用者可以進行其他的操作動作。 7. *假如鍵入的號碼是一個無效的號碼,則會聽到重 新鍵入聲。此時,使用者可以選擇蓋上按鍵蓋並離開,或 是按下"Talk"鍵以重獲撥號聲響,及重新開始第二 以 後的順序。 11 · 4· 2驗證外線撥入之振鈴列表 使用者可以從基地台端驗證所註冊的振鈴列表。在按 下MEMO鍵及存取瑪⑼後,他(她)必須鍵人順序號馬及手 機識別碼。假如前述之鍵人號碼符合所註冊的號碼 者將會聽到確認的聲響;否則會聽到重撥聲。㉟ 顯示如下: 貝斤 •打開按鍵蓋並聽到來自蜂鳴器的撥號聲響 2·按下MEMO鍵並聽到程式編輯聲(一短嗶聲) 3·鍵入編輯程式代碼,,31”,聽到確認聲(二短嗶聲) 4·鍵入一位數的手機順序號碼,然後聽到程式編輯 5·鍵入終端裝置的二位數識別碼 6 ·假如鍵入的號碼符合所註冊的號碼,則隨著撥號 ' 聲之後會發出確認聲響,·表示驗證動作成功。這時使用^ 可以進行其他的操作動作。 •假如鍵入的號碼是不同於所註冊的號碼,則會聽 到重新鍵入聲。此時,使用者可以選擇蓋上按鍵蓋並離Page 97 V. Description of the invention (95) Π · 4 Program editing list of outside callers For each base station, the user can have at most one identification code as a preset connection list for the base station. ::::: When dialing in, the connected base station will ring, and the j f line phones and mobile phones will ring in succession. If the preset first state in the list, the base station will try if the handset in the list is a wide-line mobile phone or busy, and the base station will try if the first three mobile phones are busy, then the base station assumes all Connection 'Only mobile phones that cannot be established between the base station and the remote terminal will also be connected. However, n, the list corresponds to the corresponding relationship of any base station. When there is a mapping from a mobile phone to an opportunity, the first base station is automatically set (when an outside line is placed, a base station (terminal 1 sets an identification code ^ device identification code " 00 ") to the last U.4 " Register / change outside line) to search. In order to register / change the mapping, press the 铃 button, and then follow the 'Access Code' (30). The user must press the 'Memo,' 11 of the terminal devices to identify the horse, and press. The sequence number π and two digits1. Open the key cover and hear the sequence of I-type ^ series as follows: 2. Press the MEMO key and listen to the buzzer's dial sound, 3. Type the editing program to edit Beep (-short, beep) beep 4. Key in a single digit U, hear the confirmation sound (two short beeps), serial number Yan, and then hear the program editor type the single digit identification code of the α 罝 of the terminal device 5.475321 five Explanation of the invention (96) 6. If the number entered is a valid number, a confirmation sound will be issued after the dialing sound, indicating that the number has been registered / changed successfully. At this time, the user can perform other operations. * If the number entered is an invalid number, you will hear a re-entry sound. At this time, the user can choose to close the key cover and leave, or press the "Talk" key to retrieve the dialing sound, and re- Start the sequence after the second. 11 · 4.2 Verifying the ringing list for outside dialing. The user can verify the registered ringing list from the base station. After pressing the MEMO button and accessing the phone, he or she must press the serial number and the mobile phone identification code. If the aforementioned key number matches the registered number, you will hear a confirmation sound; otherwise, you will hear a redial sound. ㉟ The display is as follows: Beg • Open the key cover and hear the dial sound from the buzzer 2. Press MEMO Key and hear the program editing sound (one short beep) 3. Enter the editing program code, 31 ", hear the confirmation sound (two short beeps) 4. Enter the single-digit mobile phone serial number, and then hear the program editing 5. Enter A two-digit identification code of the terminal device 6 If the number entered matches the registered number, a confirmation tone will sound after the dial tone, indicating that the verification operation was successful. At this time, you can use ^ for other operations. • If the number entered is different from the registered number, you will hear a re-entry sound. At this time, the user can choose to close the key cover and leave

475321475321

及重新開始第二 五、發明說明(97) 開,或是按下n Talk"鍵以重獲撥號聲響 步驟以後的順序。 11. 5指定轉接 對於每一個手機來說 使用者都可以註冊另外一個手 機的識別碼,以作為指定轉接的投遞處。在進行指— :Ϊ ί :所有通訊到這個手機的電話都將會轉接二註冊 的手機上。、假如通話是一内線電話,則基地台就會 一樣的方式工作。另外,基地台與手機兩者都不能夠指 轉接到一個外部的電話號瑪上 > 4 β % | 9 薄上的號碼。電話號碼上纟就疋说無法轉接到電話 Π· 5· 1註冊/變更指定轉接電話號碼 Τ Χ β主冊/變更扣疋轉接電話號碼,使用者需要 获署鍵,然後輸入’’存取瑪,(4〇)及二位數的,,終端 K S 。對於基地台來說,指定轉接的終端裝置必 :=美二i台。對於手機來說,指定轉接的終端裝置可以 疋^ °或是一手機。程式編輯的順序如下所示: •=開按鍵蓋並聽到來自蜂鳴器的撥號聲響 / 下MEMO鍵並聽到程式編輯聲(一短嗶聲) 4綠入編輯程式代碼"4 聽到確認聲(二短α畢聲) 5俨入終端裝置的二位數識別碼 聲之後會^1鍵入的號碼是一個有效的號碼,則隨著撥號 這時使用含出確認聲響,表示號碼已經註冊/變更成功。 6·假如5Γ以進行其他的操作動作。 鍵入的號碼是一個無效的號碼,則會聽到重And restart the twenty-fifth, invention description (97) on, or press the n Talk " key to retrieve the dial tone sequence after the step. 11. 5 Designated Transfer For each mobile phone, the user can register the identification code of another mobile phone as the delivery point of the designated transfer. Ongoing instructions:: Ϊ ί: All calls to this phone will be transferred to the second registered phone. If the call is an intercom call, the base station will work the same way. In addition, neither the base station nor the mobile phone can refer to an external phone number > 4 β% | 9 If the phone number is displayed, it is said that it is not possible to transfer to the phone Π · 5.1. 1 Register / change the designated transfer phone number Τχβ master book / change the deduction transfer phone number. The user needs to get the signature key and then enter `` Access Ma, (40) and double-digit, terminal KS. For the base station, the terminal device designated for transfer must be: = Meiji. For mobile phones, the designated terminal device can be 疋 ^ ° or a mobile phone. The sequence of program editing is as follows: • = Open the key cover and hear the dial sound from the buzzer / press the MEMO button and hear the program editing sound (a short beep) 4 Enter the editing code of the green " 4 hear the confirmation sound ( 2 short alpha beeps) 5 After entering the two-digit identification code of the terminal device, the number entered ^ 1 is a valid number. When dialing, the confirmation sound is used to indicate that the number has been registered / changed successfully. 6. If 5Γ is used for other operations. The number you typed is an invalid number and you will hear a duplicate

第100頁 475321 五、發明說明(98) 新鍵入聲。此時,使用者可以選擇篕上按鍵 是按下"Talk”鍵以重獲撥號聲響, 第=,或 後的順序。 及垔新開始第二步驟以 11 · 5 · 2驗證指定轉接電話號碼 使用者可以驗證所註冊的指 存取…,他(她)必;手= :的::所輸入的號瑪與所註冊的號碼吻合,%會= 2 [曰-否則,會發出重新鍵入聲。驗證的順序如下所 打開按鍵蓋並聽到來自蜂鳴器的撥號聲響 按下memo鍵並聽到程式編輯聲(一短嗶聲曰) 鍵入編輯程式代碼"41”,聽到確認聲(二短 鍵入終端裝置的二位數識別碼 -的整立假如志鍵入的號碼符合所註冊的號碼,則會發出確 的的聲θ ,表示驗證動作成功。這時使用者可以 的操作動作。 仃其他 1 2 · 0特殊功能組編/解組編 系統提供包括:電話指定轉接、電話轉接、不 及自動中’、手動撥號及手動中斷、最後的 重撥、快速撥號、及保留等的特殊功能設定 一二寺殊功能的操作是藉由單按鍵的方式來促成,例如. :;二:速撥號及保留。其他特殊功能的操作是藉由特殊 "V;二來完成’操作順序是先按下特殊功能存取鍵 1再輸入特殊功能存取碼。下列是特殊功能存取嗎Page 100 475321 V. Description of the Invention (98) New typing sound. At this point, the user can select the "Talk" key on the top button to retrieve the dialing sound, the order =, or the subsequent order. And the second step from the beginning is to verify the designated transfer call with 11 · 5 · 2 The number user can verify the registered finger access ..., he (she) must; hand =: of :: the number entered is consistent with the registered number,% will = 2 [say-otherwise, re-type will be issued The verification sequence is as follows. Open the key cover and hear the dial sound from the buzzer. Press the memo button and hear the program editing sound (a short beep). Type the editing program code " 41 ”and hear the confirmation sound (second short Enter the two-digit identification code of the terminal device-Erection If the number entered is consistent with the registered number, a positive sound θ will be issued, indicating that the verification operation is successful. At this time, the user can operate the operation. 仃 Other 1 2 · 0 special function group editing / ungroup editing system provides: special function settings including: call designated transfer, call transfer, less than automatic ', manual dialing and manual interruption, final redial, speed dial, and hold, etc. The operation of the second temple function is facilitated by a single button, for example.:; 2: Speed dial and reserve. The operation of other special functions is completed by the special "V" second. The sequence of operation is to first press Special function access key 1 then enter the special function access code. Is the following special function access?

475321475321

五、發明說明(99) 的較佳列表,#中要注意的是:除了轉接特殊功能是在通 話期間完成組編外,所有其他的特殊功能都是在終端裝置 閒置時進行組編與解組編。 丨f *,, "10" ~初始化通話轉接 "20" -自動撥號及自動中斷組編 π 2 Γ -自動撥號及自動中斷解組編 "3 0"-電話指定轉接組編 ” 3 Γ -電話指定轉接解組編 ”40”-不受干擾組編 "4Γ -不受干擾解組編 "5 〇 -手動撥號及手動中斷 "6〇”_廣播 12· 1電話指定轉接 如同11 · 5 · 1節中所敘述的 註冊到其他的終端裝置,以作 註冊了一個指定轉接的終端裝 用組編通話轉接的特殊功能, 至投遞處。當然,使用者亦可 特徵無效。 一樣,任何的終端裝置可以 為指定轉接的投遞處。一旦 置識別碼,使用者便可以利 來轉接所有的終端裝置通話 以用其他的順序方式使轉接 接的= 外線電話撥入’且基地台已經組編通話轉 此重複的^ =合’則被轉接的終端裝置將會連線及振鈴。 遞= : = :出二話振鈴列表"。假如這時投 '%裝置正在忙線中’則將不會搜尋到此終端裝V. A better list of the description of the invention (99). Note in #: except that the transfer special function is to complete the grouping during the call, all other special functions are grouping and ungrouping when the terminal device is idle. Group editor.丨 f * ,, " 10 " ~ Initial call transfer " 20 "-Automatic dialing and automatic interruption group π 2 Γ -Automatic dialing and automatic interruption grouping " 3 0 " -Phone designated transfer group ”3 Γ-Phone designated transfer ungrouping" 40 "-Undisturbed grouping " 4Γ-Undisturbed ungrouping " 5 〇-Manual dialing and manual interruption " 6〇" _broadcast12 · 1 The designated transfer of the phone is registered to other terminal devices as described in Section 11 · 5 · 1 for the special function of registering a designated transfer terminal and using the group call transfer to the delivery office. Of course, the user can also invalidate the feature. Similarly, any terminal device can be a designated delivery point. Once the identification code is set, the user can use it to transfer all the terminal device calls and use other sequential methods to make the transfer = outside call dialed in 'and the base station has programmed the call to repeat this ^ = 合' The transferred terminal device will connect and ring. Pass =: =: Make a ringtone list of two words ". If you cast '% device is busy on line' at this time, this terminal device will not be found.

475321 五、發明說明(100) 置。 假如發生撥 經完成組編通話 台送出。因為閒 來進行,所以前 假如發生内 組編通話轉接的 疋轉接的投遞處 當終端裝置 通話轉接之特徵 示如下: 出外線電話,則不 轉接,前述外線電 置基地台的搜尋是 述事件對於基地台 線通話事件,且終 特殊功能,則發源 建立連線。 沒有在使用時,在 的組編與解組編。 管配置的基地台是否已 話事件都將會經由基地 藉由發源端的終端裝置 來說是清楚透明的。 止的終端裝置已經完成 ‘(主控裝置)將會與指 任何時間内均可以進行 前述動作的操作順序顯 4/^321 五、發明說明(101) 1 ·拿起話筒且聽到撥號準備聲 2 ·按下特殊功能存取按鍵"*,, 3·.按下特殊功能存取碼,,4〇” ^ 行解組編此特殊功能 心丁、、且、、扁,或疋41進 4·當聽到π確認"聲時,此坎*山姑里π , 受干擾(D Dμ ^ ,. Η 、裝置可忐是設定在不 狀設定模式來判斷。 般模式,适必須根據現 12· 3電話轉接 個执ίίϊ期:’終端裝置仍可以設定電話轉接到另外- ;轉Ϊ的目的終端裝置可以是基地台或是手 機,仁疋不可以是外部的電話號碼。 假如有外線電話撥入或是内線電話撥出的情況時,手 為轉接傳送的關係而成為初始化者,基地 ==是!為與外部一端的連線是藉由公共交換式 電話網路來建立與維持,而手機與基地台之間的連線是屬 於内部的控制問題。當手機痛測到有轉接請求時,手機將 會傳送所欲轉接之終端裝置的識別碼到基地台。原來進行 中的連線將會停止並建立基地台與轉接之終端裝置間的新 連線。 假如是内線通話的情況時,主控制端或是受控控制端 奸可以初始化通話轉接。一旦偵測到轉接請求時,初始的 終端裝置會傳送轉接之終端裝置的識別碼到另外一端,同 時停止原來進行中的連線,然後沒有被更換的終端裝置便 會與轉接之終端裝置建立連線。475321 V. Description of the invention (100). If a dial-up occurs, it will be sent out through the group station. Because it is idle, the characteristics of the call transfer of the terminal device in the case of an internal group call transfer are as follows: If you make an outside call, the call will not be transferred. This is the event for the base station line call event, and the final special function is to establish the connection. When not in use, the organization and disorganization of the. Whether or not the configured base station has talked events will pass through the base station. The terminal device at the originating side is clear and transparent. The terminal device has been completed (the main control device) will show the sequence of operations that can perform the aforementioned actions at any time. 4 / ^ 321 V. Description of the invention (101) 1 · Pick up the microphone and hear the dialing sound 2 · Press the special function access button " *, 3. ·. Press the special function access code, 4〇 "^ to ungroup this special function, such as, and ,, flat, or 疋 41 into 4 · When you hear the sound of π confirmation, this kan * shanguli π, is disturbed (D Dμ ^,. Η, the device can be set to determine the state setting mode. The general mode, according to the current 12 · 3 Phone transfer period: 'The terminal device can still set the phone to another-; the destination terminal device of the transfer can be a base station or a mobile phone, and the phone number cannot be an external phone number. If there is an outside line phone In the case of dial-in or internal telephone dialing, the hand becomes the initializer for the transfer transmission relationship. Base == Yes! To establish and maintain the connection with the external end through the public switched telephone network, The connection between the mobile phone and the base station is internal Control problem. When the mobile phone painfully detects a transfer request, the mobile phone will send the identification code of the terminal device to be transferred to the base station. The original ongoing connection will be stopped and the base station and the transferred terminal will be established. New connection between the devices. In the case of an intercom call, the main control terminal or controlled control terminal can initiate the call transfer. Once a transfer request is detected, the initial terminal device will send the transferred terminal The device's identification code goes to the other end, and the original connection is stopped at the same time, and then the terminal device that has not been replaced will establish a connection with the transferred terminal device.

第104頁Chapter 104

475321 "丨 - 五、發明說明(102) 其操在雙向通話期間的任何時間内開始, 1 ·按下特殊功能存取按鍵,,*,, 2·按下特殊功能存取碼"1〇" 同時會聽到程式編輯聲 、衧殊功旎, 3· ^入二位數之終端裝置識別碼 ^▲如所輪入的數碼是一個有效的終端裝置‘別 =,則會聽到"確認|,聲。完成設定後 裝^識^生 上話筒。 冑用者可以進行其他的電話通話或是掛 踩5目,A如所輸入的數碼是-個無效的終端裝晉h 12.4中斷插話聲使用者停留在原通話模式。 此特殊功能用途為緊急事件的 者必須緊急地與受話的一 力此,例如:使用 僅說明通話的其中一端)。即使典卩的通,接觸(本發明 :用* ’使用者仍然可以依照本發§明的端疋忙線或是在 中斷插話,並與所欲接觸的一端方法來進行通話的 類似於電話總機在控制”通話等 話。此項特殊功能 話的一端必須是本發明中/ 、方法。無論如何,受 裝置。受話的-端能夠藉由"交換”:=群組中的一個終端 及舊的通話方二者擇一的方 粁啻呆作,與新的通話方475321 " 丨-5. Description of the invention (102) The operation starts at any time during a two-way conversation, 1 · Press the special function access button, * ,, 2 · Press the special function access code " 1 〇 " At the same time, you will hear program editing sounds and special features. ^ Enter a two-digit terminal device identification code ^ ▲ If the number you enter is a valid terminal device, do n’t =, you will hear " Confirm |, sound. After completing the setup, attach the microphone and put on the microphone. The user can make other phone calls or hang up to 5 items. If the number entered is an invalid terminal device, h 12.4 interrupts the voice interruption and the user stays in the original call mode. This special function is used for emergencies and must be done in an emergency with the recipient, for example: using only one end of the call). Even if the code is connected, the contact (invention: the user can still use the terminal described in the § busy line or interrupt the call and make a call similar to the telephone exchange with the terminal method In the "control" call, etc., one end of this special function must be the / method in the present invention. In any case, the receiver. The receiver-end can be exchanged by ": = a terminal in the group and the old one. One of the callers is idle, talking to the new caller

Ipt ^ 換’’操作等,一起運作的方法。〃自動撥號"功能、"交Ipt ^ Change ’’ operation, etc., to work together. 〃Auto dial " function, "

I咖 第105頁 475321 五、發明說明(103) ' —---- 1 2 · 5自動撥號 如同丨1.1 2節中所敘述的,使用者可以程式編輯自 i的電話號碼’而且這些電話號碼在緊急狀況時都是受話 。當此項特殊功能被啟動後,終端裝置將會自動地撥 :所編輯的電話號碼到受話的終端裝.置。假如受 裝置是忙線或是在使用中,將會求助於"中斷插 特= t進行通話接觸,同時受話的—端可以利用 能”全時設定"與一次:定兩種方式可以啟動此特殊功 姓"全Λ設定"使用在具備噪音感測器之型號上。-旦终 全首Λ定,'模式時,終端裝置將會-直停;在 置在"設定"模式時,每當嚷音::=動為止。當終端裝 動撥號聲響時,終端裝置便:二:2測到預先定義的自 碼。於此際,"中斷插撥出所登錄的電話號 移除啟動的順序顯示如下的功此仍然可以被啟動。啟動及 1 ·拿起話筒並聽到撥號準備聲 2·按下特殊功能存取按鍵"*,, 3 ·按下特殊功能存取满丨丨9 ^丨丨七α | 或是"2Γ移除啟動此項特殊功能來啟動此項特殊功能, "的』音假*沒有註冊自動撥匕電話號碼,會聽到"重試I Coffee, page 105, 475321 V. Description of the invention (103) '------ 1 2 · 5 Automatic dialing As described in section 丨 1.1, users can programmatically edit phone numbers from i' and these phone numbers They are talked about in an emergency. When this special function is activated, the terminal device will automatically dial the edited phone number to the called terminal device. If the receiver is busy or in use, it will turn to "Disconnect plug = t" for call contact, while the receiver-the terminal can use "full time settings" and once: two methods can be activated This special function "quotation" is used on models equipped with a noise sensor.-Once set, "the terminal device will-stop directly when in mode; set in" quotation " In the mode, whenever the beep sounds: == until it is activated. When the terminal is installed with a dial tone, the terminal device will detect a pre-defined self-code at 2: 2. At this time, " The sequence of the number removal and activation shows the following functions can still be activated. Activation and 1 · Pick up the microphone and hear the dial preparation sound 2 · Press the special function access button " * ,, 3 · Press the special function access Full 丨 丨 9 ^ 丨 丨 Seven α | or " 2Γ Remove and activate this special function to activate this special function, "; 音 ** No auto dial phone number is registered, you will hear " Retry

1 ·假如已經註冊有埒 2 到,,確認"的聲音 動撥號的電話號碼,會聽 475321 五、發明說明(104) 一次設定π將只會啟動一次”自動撥號"。當啟動 撥號的通話完畢後,終端裝置將會再一次停留在"開動 模式上。因為這種設定方式是藉由手動操作來觸發\*所的 不需要使用具備噪音感測器的設備,而且適用於所斤以 型上。除了啟動/移除啟動的方法及噪音感測器的需的機 外,一次設定的工作方式與”全時設定”的工/ 相同的。其操作順序顯示如下: 工疋凡全 1 ·拿起話筒並聽到撥號準備聲 2 ·按下特殊功能存取按鍵"木,, 功能存取碼"2°"來啟動此項特殊功能 音u又如已包括此項特殊功能,則會聽到"確認^聲 5.輸入二位數的終端裝置識別碼 1 2 · 6通話交換 當終端裝置正在與某人進 一個人要與他通話連線通話蛉,假如有另外 給予回應這個請求。:通話交換Τ = ”通話交換"的功能 話與:::話·,是有些微的不同的工作方式在外線電 必須,總機註冊"電通話話或等疋待時’其電話線(電話薄) 件’總機便會檢查此電話線是4::备發生通話交換事 的-方,總機會用嗔療聲線的聲音,假如走註冊 寻伃的-方將會得直便用者,同時” 應鈴聲。假如終端裝置使- 第够頁 五、發明說明(105) 用者要回應給總機,他可4 此’’電話架快閃"是經由美 ^用快速的按下電話架一下。 電話架快閃”的訊號時,^台轉到總機,當總機偵測到" 手機進行通話連線,同時1會將新的連線方與基地台及 相同的操作順序,終端裝f通話方置於保留狀態。應用 進行通話。這樣的操作 用者可以與原通話方重新再 進行。 作順序可以依照使用者的需求來多次 對於内線通話,"中斷 12· 4節中所敘述的一樣。它"1能的啟動方式就如同 生類似於從總機所發出"通話使用一機構來產 使用者可以利用快速的"電話架快閃,,時終端裝置 插話的-方,並且將原通話方卞置:=離來,到中斷 次"電話架快閃"’則會與原通話方重新再;行=再按一 序’,用者:以依照需求進行多次以述的順 之盔蠄雷蛘μ从焚士如心·、 興得統類比或數位 之無線電話間的基本操作上,是沒有 鬥 双位 發明的無線電話提供許多先進的特殊功能,^ θ二雖然 特殊&能的操作是簡單、容易及直接。 疋這些先 ,1 3 · 1產生内線通話 使用群組中的任何的終端裝/ 或手機進行通話。以下顯示這功能的操作順^ ··、基地台 1 ·打開按鍵蓋子,並聽到撥號準備聲 475321 五、發明說明(106) 2.按下”内線π鍵,撥號準備聲便會停止 3 ·輸入二位數的終端裝置識別碼 13· 2 撥出外線電g 胃、鱼η線電話必須透過基地台才能進行,而且基地台 =&主電話線上。假如安裝超過一個基地台以上時,發 地^產生^=會找出一個閒置的基地台’並且透過這個基 會;到忙it假如所有的基地台正在忙線中,使用者將 的士使用ίπ音:搜尋閒置基地台的動作是公開透明化 、以下顯示這功能的操作順序: • 了開按鍵蓋子,並聽到撥號準備聲 假如沒有 -個可以按利下用鍵,撥號準備聲便會停止 的基地台,會聽到忙線的聲音 ^輸人發射源的電話號碼 號碼 能夠藉會被儲存在話機中,使用者 話號碼。其操作順序顯示:下便能夠再-次撥出相同的電 I· 打開按鐽筌工# I 2妞了" 蓋子並聽到撥號準備聲 A按下重撥”鍵 述之 碼,以作為ί ::夠儲存最多20組最常使用的電話费 簡早的知作順序 :使用者了以根據下列所描 1 ·打開接Μ楚/、^ 1電話號碼產生通話·· 羞子並聽到撥號準備聲 發明說明(107) 2·按下"通話"鍵 3·按下”記憶”鍵 13β 五 撥號準備聲便會停止 同時會出現快速撥號索引(0 1 - 2 0 ) 在電話通話期間,通話的對 另一個終端裝置。 可以轉接線上的電話給 1按下,,4“ 序顯示如下: •筏下特殊功能"鍵(” *,,) 2 ·輸入特殊功能存取碼,,1 0 ” ^ 數的終端裝置識別碼⑷-20) 13.6將:^置於保留狀態 在電話通話期間,通爷的 於保留狀態十J伴=的二方可以將另-個通話方置 默。 ’、 被保留的一方只會聽到沉 1 ·按下π保留”鍵 徑 2.再一次按·F"保留"鍵便能重新恢復原來的通話路 13· !_廣後jgL息 1 ·拿起話筒並聽到撥號準備聲音 2 ·按下特殊功能存取鍵"*,, 3·按下特殊功能存取碼”6〇",並且產生一公主 4·掛上電話 口 14 ·系統的使用 .本發明的無線電系統提供在基地台與手機、手機盥丰 —一共交換式電話網路間之聲‘ 475321 五、發明說明(108) 周邊裝置間的電替及聲 .機數目可電:、!路及理論上無限數量的手 基地台此系'統中所有的終端裝置、 式::,以避免任何未經過授權的使盜 -端裝置、基地台或手機都有他自己話任: 一隻手機欲撥出外線電話,都必 =碼任何 之-來發出4閒置基地台的搜尋頁台的其中 尋來完成。任意兩個終端裝置都可以依動搜 距離長度來進行内線通話,換句話說,每一個故ς =的 能達到的距離範圍大約是1〇〇〇公尺。此 f鳊裝置所 地台間的距離範圍是獨立的。 壬何一個基 每一個基地台都配備著一條電話線路 可同時建構12條電話線路。理論上在系:=夕 只要,通訊負載允許’可以安裝的手機 置之間,而且最多允許12個同時進行與终端裝 :手機裝置都可以經由任一個閒置的基地台來撥出1 · If you have registered 埒 2 to, confirm the phone number for voice dialing, you will hear 475321 V. Description of invention (104) Setting π once will only activate "Auto Dial". When dialing is activated After the call is over, the terminal device will stay in the "Activation mode" again. Because this setting method is triggered by manual operation, it is not necessary to use a device with a noise sensor, and it is suitable for all Model. Except for the method of starting / removing the starter and the machine required for the noise sensor, the working mode of the one-time setting is the same as that of the "full-time setting". Its operation sequence is shown below: 1 · Pick up the microphone and hear the dial-reading sound 2 · Press the special function access button " wooden, function access code " 2 ° " to activate this special function. If the special function is included, , You will hear " confirmation ^ sound. 5. Enter the two-digit terminal device identification code 1 2 · 6 call exchange. When the terminal device is in contact with someone, a person wants to talk to him and talk to him. If there is another response to this Request .: Call exchange T = "The function of call exchange" is the same as :: call, which is a slightly different way of working. It is required for outside line calls, and the switchboard registration "waits for calls" Phone line (phone book) piece, the switchboard will check that this phone line is 4 :: prepared for a call exchange-the party, the total opportunity to use the sound of the healing sound line, if you go to register to find the-the party will be straight The user should also ring at the same time. If the terminal device makes-page five, the description of the invention (105) If the user wants to respond to the switchboard, he can 4 "The flash of the phone rack" is fast through the United States. Press the phone rack once. When the phone rack flashes, the ^ station is transferred to the switchboard. When the switchboard detects that the mobile phone is connected to the call, at the same time, 1 will connect the new connection party to the base station and perform the same operation. In sequence, the terminal device f puts the caller on hold. Apply Make a call. This operation can be repeated with the original caller. The operation sequence can be repeated as many times as required by the user. For an intercom call, "Interruption" is the same as described in Section 12.4. It can be activated in a similar way to a call sent from the switchboard. Using a mechanism to produce a user can use the fast flashing of the telephone rack, when the terminal device plugs in, and the original Set the caller: = departure, when the call is interrupted " the phone frame flashes " 'will be re-connected with the original caller; OK = again in the order', user: repeat as many times as required From the basic operation of the wireless telephones, such as the burning of a soldier, the analogy or digital radio, the wireless telephone without the invention of the dual bit provides many advanced special functions. ^ Θ2 Although special & The operation is simple, easy and direct.疋 These first, 1 3 · 1 Make an intercom call Use any terminal device / or mobile phone in the group to make a call. The following shows the operation of this function ^ ··, base station 1 · Open the key cover and hear the dial preparation sound 475321 V. Description of the invention (106) 2. Press the "internal line π" button, the dial preparation sound will stop 3 · Input Two-digit terminal device identification code 13. 2 Dialing outside line calls. Stomach and fish line calls must be made through the base station, and base station = & main phone line. If more than one base station is installed, the origin ^ Generate ^ = will find an idle base station 'and pass this conference; when it is busy, if all the base stations are busy, the user will use taxis: the search for idle base stations is open and transparent The following shows the operation sequence of this function: • Open the button cover and hear the dial preparation sound. If there is no-you can press the key, the dial preparation sound will stop, and you will hear the busy line sound ^ Input The phone number of the human transmitting source can be stored in the phone and the user's phone number. The sequence of operation is shown below: the same phone number can be dialed out again. · Press 鐽 筌 工 # I 2 I ’ve covered the cover and heard the dial-reading sound A. Press the “Redial” key to describe the code as ί :: Enough to store up to 20 sets of most commonly used phone charges. Description 1 · Open the phone number and make a call with ^ 1 phone number ·· Shame and hear the dial preparation sound Invention Description (107) 2 · Press the "Call" key 3 · Press the "Memory" key 13β Five dial The preparation sound will stop and the speed dial index (0 1-2 0) will appear. During the phone call, the call is made to another terminal device. You can transfer the call on the line to 1. Press, and the 4 "sequence is displayed as follows: • Special function under the raft key" "(* ,,) 2 · Enter the special function access code, 1 0" ^ terminal device Identification code ⑷-20) 13.6 Put: ^ put on hold During a telephone conversation, the two parties of Tongye ’s ten-party partner in the hold state can silence the other caller. ', The reserved party will only Hear Shen 1 · Press π Hold "key diameter 2. Press the F " Hold " key again to resume the original conversation path 13!! _ 广 后 jgL 息 1 · Pick up the microphone and hear the dial preparation sound 2 • Press the special function access key " * ,, 3, press the special function access code "6〇", and generate a princess 4. Hang up the phone port 14 Use of the system. The radio system of the present invention provides In the base station and mobile phones, mobile phones-a total exchange of telephone network voices' 475321 V. Description of the invention (108) Electricity and sound between peripheral devices. The number of machines can be electric:,!, And theoretically unlimited number All hand-held base stations in this system are all terminal devices in the system: An unauthorized unauthorized device, base station, or mobile phone has his own responsibility: A mobile phone must dial any number to make an outside call, to issue a search page of 4 idle base station search pages. It can be done. Any two terminal devices can make intercom calls according to the length of the search distance. In other words, the reachable range of each device is about 1000 meters. The location of this device The distance range between the stations is independent. Each base station is equipped with a telephone line to construct 12 telephone lines at the same time. Theoretically in the system: = As long as the communication load allows 'installable mobile phones' And up to 12 simultaneous terminal installations: mobile devices can be dialed out via any idle base station

第ill頁 $、發明說明(109) 14. 2可擴充的設定 - —--------—·—> 根據模組化的結構設計,使用者能夠同時安裝數個基 地台,在本發明之最佳實施例中是丨2個基地台,同時使用 2可以先建構部分初始使用的手機後,再利用額外的基地 台及(或)手機擴充他(她)的系統,因為對於擴展作用來說 並沒有超過累積數量的問題。 1 4: 3通用線通話能力 利用本發明獨特的辨識及通訊協定,系統可以提供在 =「個建構中的任意兩個終端裝置間、基地台或是手機間 置通訊連線。利用通用的内線通話功能,某一個終端裝 話,基地台或是手機就可以直接的與其他終端裝置進行通 而不需要透過公共交換式電話網路(psTN)。換句話 °圍内兩:終端裝置間只要是維持在系統可以運作的距離範 是10on八^便=夠進行通話,而前述之運作距離範圍大約 則手μ: 。假如是手機裝置對手機裝置間的内線通話, H機裝置到基地台間的距離是沒有關係的。在圖示 法。本發明也較提果供入一^田的描述說明前述作用的運作方 話盔&古 "二加強的内線通話功能,例如:使通 1·: = :的振龄聲、室内監測及廣播功能。 中斷插系牲提供-個可以在聲音通訊裡進行 地台或是手機在發:緊允許任何的終端裝置、基 立的通話。有兩種方k件時,可以中斷插人—個已建 钔植方去可以初始化此中斷插話的功能:自Page ill $, Description of the invention (109) 14. 2 Expandable settings -----------------> According to the modular structure design, the user can install several base stations at the same time, In the preferred embodiment of the present invention, there are 2 base stations. Using 2 at the same time can first construct a part of the initial mobile phone, and then use additional base stations and / or mobile phones to expand his or her system, because for In terms of expansion, there is no problem of exceeding the cumulative number. 1 4: 3 Universal Line Call Capability Using the unique identification and communication protocol of the present invention, the system can provide a communication connection between any two terminal devices, base stations, or mobile phones in a construction. Use a universal extension Call function, if a terminal is installed, the base station or mobile phone can directly communicate with other terminal devices without going through the public switched telephone network (psTN). In other words, within two ranges: as long as the terminal device It is maintained at a range where the system can operate at 10 ^^^ = enough to make a call, and the aforementioned operating distance range is about hand μ:. If it is an internal call between a mobile phone device and a mobile phone device, between the H device and the base station The distance is irrelevant. In the illustration method, the present invention also provides a detailed description of the operation of the aforementioned function. The square helmet & ancient " Second enhanced intercom call function, for example: make pass 1 ·: =: Vibration age sound, indoor monitoring and broadcasting functions. Interruption system provides a platform or mobile phone that can be used for voice communication: Any terminal device, base . When there are two parties, then k pieces can break inserted - a plant has been built mendelevium parties to this interruption can be initialized chipped features: self

mm 第112頁 475321mm Page 112 475321

動及手動。一旦啟動中斷插話之功能,兩個被中 終端裝置便會聽到中斷插話的聲音,決定是否要= 此中斷插話。假如他們選擇回應此中斷插話的電話, 成中斷插話回應後,立刻的自動重新建立原來的 1 4 · 5偵測及自動撥號 測裝置會進行偵測預先設定好 聲、警報聲、嬰兒哭聲、窗戶 測設定是在電話進入時,即自 碼或是手機的號碼,則在終端 旦聽到適當的噪音便會回應此 功能的結合上,即使被指定之 他人進行通話,起始的終端裝 中。 噪音感測裝置,則此噪音感 的噪音範圍,例如:汽笛 碰撞聲等等。假如開始的偵 動的切入程式編輯的電話號 裝置撥出電話後,接收端一 電話。在與自動中斷插話之 終端裝置的使用者正在與其 置仍然可以中斯插入其通話 14· 6智慧型範圍偵測 理論上,在兩個實體裝置間的距離範圍是1〇〇〇公尺。 無論如何,前述的數據是在視野較沒阻隔的地方所量測得 到’ f際上’可能都有一些障礙物會在兩個終端裝置之間 的適當位置阻礙有效距離,而這些障礙物例如是:混凝土 蹄、鋼棒、金屬物體、固態的隔板。因此,有效距離範圍 值會隨著所在位置不同而有所變化。使用這個特殊功能, 使用者可以容易的知道他(她)是否可以與目標的一方進行 通訊。這個使用者友善操作的功能,可以讓使用者知道此Manual and manual. Once the interrupted call is activated, the two devices will hear the interrupted call and decide whether or not to = interrupt the call. If they choose to respond to this interrupted call, after the interrupted call is answered, they will automatically re-establish the original 1 4 · 5 detection and automatic dial test device will detect the preset good sound, alarm sound, baby cry, The window test setting is when the phone enters, that is, the code or the number of the mobile phone. Once the terminal hears an appropriate noise, it will respond to the combination of this function. Even if the designated person is talking, the initial terminal is installed. Noise sensing device, the noise range of this noise sensation, such as whistle collision sound, etc. Suppose the initiation of the program is triggered by the programmed phone number. After the device makes a call, the receiver receives a call. When the user of the terminal device interrupts the call automatically, the user can still insert his call with him. 14.6 Intelligent range detection Theoretically, the distance between two physical devices is 1000 meters. In any case, the aforementioned data is measured in a place where the field of view is relatively unobstructed. There may be some obstacles in the field of view that will prevent the effective distance between the two terminal devices. These obstacles are, for example, : Concrete hoof, steel rod, metal object, solid partition. Therefore, the effective distance range value varies depending on the location. With this special function, the user can easily know whether he (she) can communicate with the target party. This user-friendly feature lets users know about this

五、發明說明(ill) 終知裝置的通話> 距離範圍,而進行兩° I有效距離範圍,或是即將超出有效 :進仃兩者之一的位置調整。 14· 7 ^動的切換1道 私从,t所建立之頻道的噪音值超過分界值,夺统铲豹自 動的找出並切換到-個較好的頻道。 系…“夠自 1列表 順位的手機順位的手機裝置正忙線中… 1么9快速撥號 電話=碼個、、端裝置可以程式編輯最多20組之最常使用的 15·内孝电電話答錚機 話义都Γ備^建的電話答錄機。此内建的電 前述雷爷夂絲Ϊ 聲音訊息紀錄及錄放音的能力。 # 一 1 i二凃機之全部錄製時間總長為6分鐘又30秒❹對 ΐt系統而言’例如是12個基地台的情況,其 王°p錄製時間總長將會是卜J、時又1 8分鐘。 16· a a =參考第21圖不’系統提供在任意兩個終端裝置、基 ,口〔手機、包括下列系統之組合間的通訊連線。所包括 ,、且,例如·(1)遠端内線通話;(2)内線通話;(3 )中斷 ^4)經由最近的基地台進行外線撥入接收/撥出外線 $ ’( 5)經由較遠的基地台進行外線撥入接收/撥出外線V. Description of the invention (ill) Call of the known device > distance range, and perform an effective distance range of two degrees I, or is about to exceed the effective range: enter one of the two position adjustments. 14.7 Shifting 1 channel privately, the noise value of the channel established by t exceeds the cut-off value, and the leader will automatically find and switch to a better channel. Department ... "A mobile device with sufficient mobile phone rank in order from 1 list is busy ... 1? 9 speed dial phone = code number, terminal device can program up to 20 sets of the most commonly used 15 · inner filial phone calls The phone has a built-in telephone answering machine. The built-in telephone mentioned above is capable of recording and playing audio messages. The total recording time of the first and second coating machine is 6 minutes. For another 30 seconds, for the ΐt system, for example, in the case of 12 base stations, the total recording time of the king ° p will be J, and the time will be 18 minutes. 16 · aa = refer to Figure 21 Communication connection between any two terminal devices, base ports, mobile phones, and combinations of the following systems. Included, and, for example, (1) remote intercom calls; (2) intercom calls; (3) interruptions ^ 4) External line dial-in receiving / outgoing outside line via nearest base station $ '(5) External line dial-in receiving / outgoing outside line via remote base station

第114芦 475321 五、發明說明(112) 電話;(6)感測(嬰兒哭聲、門鈴聲、煙霧/運動谓測裝 置),及(7)自動撥號。 ' 下列將說明 相類似的,煩請參考第22A至2 2D的圖示 各種不同之通訊連線設定的圖示内容: 圖示22A-兩方(使用者A及B)正在通話。 圖示22B-第三者(使用者C)中斷插話。 者c)並暫 圖示22C -使用者B回應中斷插話的一方( 時停止使用者A的通話。 圖示22D-使用者B在完成與使用者c的通話後,再與 用者A繼讀通話。 、 17·數據機的特殊用% 煩凊參考第5及第23至29的圖示,以下將敘述使用在 頻譜(DSSS)數據機中之-較佳的特殊用途 ί β此較佳的特殊用途積體電路提供-協定 „奴提供電訊唬以完成雙向無線電波的結合、提 積的::::中i無線電話的功能操作’α及使用較小體 1見此特殊用途積體電路對於本發 於在接收電路方面的,此特殊用途積體電路提供有助 號處理’包括有:取樣器、解調變 器及乂感’這生b裝晉足 丨 & #夕Μ Μ 一足利用金氏碼來覆蓋在差動相位 m m 加反机 違到支杈雙正交的電訊號。此外還 附常一個優點:金庆石民从r匕t ^ ^ . , . ^氏1的互斥規定,及允許分攤操作頻率 的牛正式的協定,也就县% π f 攏奘番斜主地壯 尤疋祝可以提供使用者重複使用、手 機裝置對手機裝置的诵% ^ ^ ^ 、Λ、雙向無線電波或内線通話、及Section 114 Lu 475321 V. Description of the invention (112) Telephone; (6) Sensing (baby cry, doorbell, smoke / sports measuring device), and (7) Automatic dialing. 'The following will explain the similar, please refer to the icons of 22A to 2 2D. The contents of the various communication connection settings: Icon 22A-two parties (users A and B) are talking. Figure 22B-The third party (user C) interrupts the call. (C) Figure 22C-User B stops responding to the party who interrupted the call (when user A stops the call. Figure 22D-User B finishes the call with user c and then reads with user A. 17 、 Special use of modems. Please refer to the diagrams of Nos. 5 and 23 to 29. The following is a description of the preferred special uses used in DSSS modems. Β This better Special-purpose integrated circuit provides-agreement "Slave provides telecommunications to complete the integration and accumulation of two-way radio waves :::: the functional operation of the medium-sized radiotelephone 'α and the use of smaller bodies 1 see this special-purpose integrated circuit For this issue in the receiving circuit, this special-purpose integrated circuit provides helpful processing 'including: sampler, demodulator, and sense of feeling' This is a perfect installation 丨 &# 夕 Μ Μ One foot The use of King's code to cover the bi-orthogonal telecommunication signal of the addition of the negative at mm in the differential phase. In addition, there is also an advantage: Jin Qing Shimin's mutual exclusion rule of ^^^,. , And the official agreement that allows the sharing of operating frequencies, that is, the county% π f Cloth particular strong wish to offer users the reusable apparatus recite% phone handset apparatus ^ ^ ^, Λ, extension call or two-way radio waves, and

第115頁 475321Page 115 475321

五、發明說明(113) 多個使用者的電話會議的功能。 雙正交電訊號的發明至今至少已經有30年的歷史,但 是因為它的電訊號特性表現相似於正交電訊號,而且正交 電訊號在解調變時不需要一絕對相位參考位準,所以相信 很少有關雙正父電訊號的實施例。金氏碼以提供一組容易 實施之近似正交電訊號而聞名於世,而且自從發現前述方 法後’金氏碼已經被廣泛使用在直接順序式展佈頻譜數據 機中。 另一個知名的解釋是丨988年在阿爾頓(Aller ton)舉辦 的第二十六屆"通訊、控制及計算機研討會”之會議記錄中 的第107至109頁,由史達克(stark)與渥依爾(Woerner)所 共同提出的''格子編碼技術應用於直接順序複合存取式展 佈頻譜通訊π。前述方法乃是利用一額外的位元(即使這額 外的位元只能產生相同的效果),並且基於正交金氏碼之 族譜的任意成員的相位翻轉都可適用於實施此雙正交組 合。而且,習知技藝中利用第一個位元來傳送資料的方 法,可由1 994年第二屆”無線電研討會年會”之會議記錄中 的第164至175頁,由巴特瑞斯(Bart Rice)所提出的,,可 變速率之CDMA及網路的順序產生與偵測”一文中查到。無 論如何,包括上述已經確認之特殊功能的電訊號圖、沒有 描述到的硬體或軟體實施的電訊號圖,都是可以查知的。 舉凡據以實施下列技藝皆為本發明之目標範圍:^金氏碼 提供給電訊號設定的正交成員,而保有實施雙正交電訊號 的優點,前述之正交成員即是每個符號中的第一個η —丨位V. Description of the Invention (113) The function of a conference call for multiple users. The invention of the bi-orthogonal electrical signal has at least 30 years of history, but because its electrical signal characteristics are similar to the orthogonal electrical signal, and the orthogonal electrical signal does not require an absolute phase reference level during demodulation, Therefore, it is believed that there are few embodiments of the double father signal. The King's code is world-famous for providing a set of approximately orthogonal telecommunications signals that are easy to implement, and since the discovery of the aforementioned method, the 'Kin' code has been widely used in direct-sequence spread-spectrum modems. Another well-known explanation is pages 107 to 109 of the proceedings of the twenty-sixth "Communications, Control, and Computer Symposium" held in Aller ton in 988, by stark ) And Woerner's "lattice coding technology is applied to direct sequential compound access spread spectrum communication π. The aforementioned method is to use an extra bit (even if this extra bit can only Produces the same effect), and phase inversion based on any member of the family of the Orthogonal King ’s code can be applied to implement this biorthogonal combination. Moreover, in the conventional technique, the first bit is used to transmit data, The sequence of variable-rate CDMA and networks can be generated from pages 164 to 175 of the minutes of the second "Radio Seminar Annual Meeting" of 994, proposed by Bart Rice. "Detected" article. Regardless, the signal diagrams of the special functions identified above, as well as the signal diagrams of hardware or software implementations not described, can be found. For example, it is the scope of the present invention to implement the following techniques: ^ King's code is provided to the orthogonal members set by the telecommunication signal, while retaining the advantages of implementing the orthogonal signal, the aforementioned orthogonal members are in each symbol. The first η — 丨 bit

五、發明說明(1⑷ "—' - 元’另一個實施的技巧是在疊加上去之差動相位偏移的關 鍵訊號’前述關鍵訊號提供電訊號設定之正反相的成員, 也就是在每個符號的最後一個位元。 郎根據以上詳細的描述,可知本發明之^線t話實施的 MAAA佈^譜數據機_。尤其特別的是中央處理單元提供 包括以下所需要的機能運作:系統初始化、高位準的電話 功能,例如:按鍵面板、發光二極體、切換開關處理器、 面板模組中的液晶顯示控制處理器、電話線介面的控制、 數位訊號處理器處理時的控制、在手機裝置與基地$間及 手機裝置與手機裝置間的通訊協定及電訊號、以及無線電 波模組的控制。控制器的軟體可支援到最新的微處理器, π時本發明的最佳實施例已經使用前述最新的微處理器來 進行程式編碼。 ° .對於一 購配備,其功控制是 音的產生與偵測、CPS/VOX的偵測、其他電話進行的聲 音、錄音與放音、LPC的講話聲音產生及訊息方塊的管 ,。對於那些沒有聲音訊息錄音/放音之能力的手機而 ϋ ’並;又有k供數位訊號處理器,所以一些必須要有的 皞都是藉由中央處理單元來掌控。 ' 相對於數據機的重要性’本發明較佳之獲AJJ^體 電一可程式化的單晶片、直V. Description of the invention (1⑷ " —'- yuan 'Another implementation technique is to superimpose the key signal of the differential phase shift on the superposition. The aforementioned key signal provides the members of the positive and negative phases of the electrical signal setting, which The last bit of each symbol. Lang According to the above detailed description, we can know that the MAAA spectrum data machine implemented by the present invention is especially useful. The central processing unit provides the following functions: system Initialization, high-level telephony functions, such as: keypad, light-emitting diode, switch processor, LCD display control processor in panel module, control of telephone line interface, control during digital signal processor processing, The communication protocol and telecommunications signals between the mobile phone device and the base unit, and between the mobile phone device and the mobile phone device, and the control of the radio wave module. The software of the controller can support the latest microprocessor. The aforementioned latest microprocessors have been used for program coding. ° For a purchased device, its power control is tone generation and detection, CPS / VOX Detection, voice from other phones, recording and playback, LPC speech sound generation, and message box management. For those phones that do not have the ability to record / play back voice messages, there is also “k” for digital The signal processor, so some necessary must be controlled by the central processing unit. 'Importance with respect to the modem' The present invention is better to obtain AJJ ^ body electrical programmable single chip, straight

475321475321

五、發明說明(115) 佈、倒頻、分時雙工控制、取樣、自動頻率控制、解倒 頻、符號解碼及對於内線通話系統的時序需求等。此特殊 用途積體電路也提供無線電波與調變器與中央處理單元間 的介面。 一般而言,特生路的接收在接收到竿 一 之後」才t從中間頻率(n IF")訊號中發展出 要利用一餘弦參考曲線便能提供前述中間訊號的參考比 對,及後續的訊號反相動作。經過這樣處理方式的訊號會 比習用之反相取樣技術的訊號有更銳利的對比度,而且習 知技術需要一餘弦曲線及一正弦曲線等兩個參考號 兩個頻道中進行樣本的輪流反相比對。 ^煩請參考圖示23的電路圖,此電路圖所表示的部分 是:供給餘弦曲線的參考電路500,以下即描述此部分電 路的組成。 電路500的主要組成元件包括:每次動作都會帶有一 低重置且正邊緣觸發的2D正反器5〇2及514、具有補數輸出 的驅動裝置504、互斥或閘5〇6及一互斥非或閘5〇8。同 時,此電路也包括了兩個二對一的多工器51〇及512、及低 重置且負邊緣觸發的2D正反器516及518。此外,還有二個 艰隨裝置520及522,及二個互斥或閘524、526。 如同圖23中所表示,輸入的中間頻率訊號藉由線路 28而進入到正反器5〇2,正反器5〇2的輸出是連結到互斥 或閉506及-互斥非或_8的輸入端,互斥或閘5()6的輸V. Description of the invention (115) Distribution, cepstrum, time-sharing duplex control, sampling, automatic frequency control, descrambling, symbol decoding, and timing requirements for intercom systems. This special-purpose integrated circuit also provides the interface between radio waves and modulators and the central processing unit. Generally speaking, the reception of the Tessen Road is only after receiving the pole one. From the intermediate frequency (n IF ") signals, it is necessary to use a cosine reference curve to provide the reference comparison of the aforementioned intermediate signals, and the subsequent signals. Reverse operation. The signal processed in this way will have sharper contrast than the signal of the conventional inverse sampling technology, and the conventional technology requires a reverse inverse comparison of the samples in two reference numbers such as a cosine curve and a sine curve. Correct. ^ Please refer to the circuit diagram shown in Figure 23. The part shown in this circuit diagram is: the reference circuit 500 that supplies the cosine curve. The composition of this part of the circuit is described below. The main components of circuit 500 include: 2D flip-flops 502 and 514 with a low reset and positive edge trigger for each action, a drive device 504 with complement output, a mutex or gate 506, and a Mutually exclusive OR gate 508. At the same time, this circuit also includes two two-to-one multiplexers 51 and 512, and 2D flip-flops 516 and 518 with low reset and negative edge trigger. In addition, there are two following devices 520 and 522 and two mutually exclusive OR gates 524 and 526. As shown in FIG. 23, the input intermediate frequency signal enters the flip-flop 502 through the line 28, and the output of the flip-flop 502 is connected to the mutex or closed 506 and -mutex non-or_8 Input of the mutex or gate 5 () 6

第118頁 475321 五、發明說明(116) 1 連;认到—對一的多工器510的輸入,同時,互斥非咬門 5。8的輸出連結到二對一的多工器512的輸入,二二' η的輸出連結到跟隨裝置522,以保持正反器5夕 、 而正反器518的輸出是連結到跟隨褒置52〇。 互斥非或閘508的輸出端連結到二對一多工 入端,利用多工器512的輸出端連結到正反器51/及互斥二 閘524與斥或閘526。跟隨裝置52〇及522的輸出端供給了 ζ 兩疋件的同相訊號輸出,然而互斥或閘524、526的 = 兩元件的反相訊號輸出…,使用前述電路的 、”疋僅僅需要一個餘弦參考曲線,便可以翻轉整個訊號 為反相訊號,相較於較複雜的習知處理方式需要一餘弦曲b 線及「正弦曲線等兩個參考訊號,才能使交替樣本的相位 翻轉,到一樣的效果,3時前述方法之另—優點是可以使 用計算處理能力較低的處理器來進行電訊號的處理。 請參考圖24至27,圖中所說明的是取樣及排序的電路 元件。這些電路元件大部分是使用習用的零件來實施,同 時排序的技巧也是來自於常見的反相(Q)取樣方式。無論 如何’本發明之電路已經排除了習用電路必須結合混成两正 弦曲線之參考訊號及反相訊號之產生器的缺點(在本發明 中只需要兩個反相器便可以取代前述之習用電路),同時 冬發明之電路不會發生頻道誤結合的錯誤。圖24厂27中所 使用的特殊電路元件包括:能夠在沒有相位對準信號的情 況下’仍然具有調整同相(I)及反相(Q)信號能力^路^ 件。相對於所有其他的無線電通訊系統為了確保通訊使用Page 118 475321 V. Description of the invention (116) 1 connection; Recognition-input to one-to-one multiplexer 510, meanwhile, the output of mutually exclusive non-biting gate 5.8 is connected to two-to-one multiplexer 512 Input, the output of two two'n is connected to the follower device 522 to maintain the flip-flop, and the output of the flip-flop 518 is connected to the follow-up device 52. The output of the mutex NOR gate 508 is connected to the two-to-one multiplexer input, and the output of the multiplexer 512 is connected to the flip-flop 51 / and the mutex gate 524 and the NOR gate 526. The outputs of the followers 52 and 522 provide the in-phase signal output of the two ζ components, but the mutually exclusive OR gate 524, 526 = the two-component inverse signal output ..., using the aforementioned circuit, "疋 only needs a cosine The reference curve can flip the entire signal into an inverted signal. Compared with more complex conventional processing methods, two reference signals, such as a cosine curve and a "sine curve," are required to reverse the phase of the alternating samples. The effect, another method at 3 o'clock-the advantage is that you can use a processor with low computing power to process the signal. Please refer to Figures 24 to 27, which illustrate the sampling and sequencing circuit components. These circuits Most of the components are implemented using conventional parts, and the sequencing technique also comes from the common inverse (Q) sampling method. In any case, the circuit of the present invention has eliminated that the conventional circuit must combine the reference signal mixed with two sine curves and Disadvantages of the generator of the inverting signal (in the present invention, only two inverters are needed to replace the conventional circuit described above). The Mingzhi circuit will not have the error of channel mis-combination. The special circuit components used in Figure 24 and Factory 27 include: the ability to adjust the in-phase (I) and reverse-phase (Q) signals without phase alignment signals ^ 路 ^ Relative to all other radio communication systems in order to ensure the use of communications

第119頁 475321 五、發明說明(in) 的適當頻率頻寬 參考,而本發明 空間中通訊時, 沒有相位對準信 的頻率頻寬狀況 的需求,否則在 外的電氣回路。 請參考圖24 邊緣觸發的正反 電路組件也包括 544 及546 圖24 率管理的 為了確保 著,如此 致產生錯 追蹤回路 號,以及 回路用的 生機會是 送之初始 此,特殊 月色都需要 收的功能 ’及一 中的電 能力, 較微弱 便可以 誤。同 用的偵 作為頻 偵錯訊 报少的 同步發 用途積 本發明 ,都需要利用一相位對準信號來作為訊號 中之圖24-27的電路元件功能則是管理在 可以保持適當頻率頻寬;也就是說,即使 號,仍然可以建立及維持通訊連線在適當 。總之,除非是在習知之無線通訊系統中 本發明的最佳實施例中,是不需要這些額 ’電路组件5 2 8包括·· 4個帶有低重置及正 圆,,及538。;:如圖^及: :帶有低重置的4位元正反器54〇、542、 帶有低重置之8位元偏移暫存器548。 路組件528也提供一有助於混成信號之功 同時此官理能力也包括電流的處理,這是 的參考位元可以有強壯的電流位元來跟隨 t被取代的電路具有一樣的功能,而且不 時+,隨後的訊號處理會發展出一作為晶片 =矾號,及作為訊號強度評估用的偵錯訊 =回路用的谓錯訊號,其中晶片追縱 k時會與晶片頻率一樣,但是這樣的發 生日!路i件528也藉由訊號頻率及晶片傳 ^_立起動這些回路的參考訊號。因 的益二 =有的功能’而且這些功 ,,,、、、、系統,以便實施基頻傳送與接 475321 - 五、發明說明(118) 請參考圖2 5,電路組件5 5 0包括··兩個4 X 4位元的乘法 器551及552 ;兩個8位元的絕對值計算器553及554 ;兩個 具有快速傳送能力的4位元二進位全加法器5 5 5及5 5 6 ;及 一個1位元二進位的全加法器5 5 7。此電路組件也包括兩個 互斥或閘558及559。 請參考圖26,電路組件562包括:兩個4X4位元的乘法 器5 64及5 66 ;四個互斥或閘568、5 70、572及574 ;兩個8 位元的絕對值計算器576及578 ;兩個具有快速傳送能力的 4位元一進位全力^法器5 8 〇及5 8 2 ; —個1位元二進位的全加 法器584,及一個具有頻率區別能力的累加器586。 請參考圖27,電路組件588包括:一個6奈秒延遲閘 590_; —個具有兩倍驅動能力的2對1乘法器592 ;及兩個8 位元的D型正反器594及596。 於訊號的處 的調整速率 就是一般相 整動作已排 人端的時脈 信號樣式的 相位在空間 參考相位便 使用在本發 述同步工程 步工程計算 甶 續頻率 次,也 這個調 或是主 包括了 保持同 建立的 是為了 所以前 要的同 if $在圖23 - 27的電路中完成,而且連 疋每個資料框/每一個電訊號產生一 位(N)與90度相位差的調整速率,同時 $ 了充裕的頻率偏置,這是由於都卜勒 /又有對準到隨後的處理程序,這些程序 ^正及解調變。因此,這些電訊號可以 不ΐ傳播。所以針對隨後的處理程序而 明=要了。總之,快速的同歩工程需求 s γ ^短期間的時間域資料框而設計, ,, 比較習用無線電通訊系統中所需 而使用更少的微處理器資源來完P.119 475321 V. Appropriate frequency bandwidth reference of the invention description (in), and there is no need for the frequency bandwidth status of the phase alignment signal when communicating in the space of the invention, otherwise the electrical circuit is out. Please refer to Figure 24. The edge-triggered positive and negative circuit components also include 544 and 546. Figure 24 The rate management is to ensure that this will cause the wrong tracking circuit number and the chance of the circuit to be used. The special moonlight requires it. The function of the receiver 'and the electrical capacity of the middle can be mistaken. Simultaneous detection is used as a synchronous transmission application with few error detection signals. The present invention requires the use of a phase alignment signal as the signal in the signal. The circuit element of Figure 24-27 is managed to maintain the appropriate frequency bandwidth. ; That is, even if the number, you can still establish and maintain communication connections in place. In short, except in a conventional wireless communication system, the preferred embodiment of the present invention does not require these components. The circuit component 5 2 8 includes ... 4 with low reset and roundness, and 538. ;: As shown in Figure ^ and:: 4-bit flip-flops 54 and 542 with low reset, and 8-bit offset register 548 with low reset. The circuit component 528 also provides a function that helps to mix signals. At the same time, this official capability also includes current processing. This is because the reference bit can have a strong current bit to follow the circuit replaced by t. From time to time, the subsequent signal processing will develop a chip = alum number, and a debug signal for signal strength evaluation = a predicate signal for the loop, where the chip will track the same frequency as the chip, but this The occurrence date of the circuit i 528 also starts the reference signals of these circuits by signal frequency and chip transmission. Because of the benefits of two = some functions' and these functions ,,,,,,,, and systems to implement the fundamental frequency transmission and connection 475321-V. Description of the invention (118) Please refer to Figure 25, circuit components 5 5 0 include · Two 4 X 4-bit multipliers 551 and 552; two 8-bit absolute value calculators 553 and 554; two 4-bit binary full adders with fast transfer capabilities 5 5 5 and 5 5 6; and a 1-bit binary full adder 5 5 7. This circuit assembly also includes two mutually exclusive OR gates 558 and 559. Please refer to FIG. 26, the circuit component 562 includes: two 4 × 4-bit multipliers 5 64 and 5 66; four mutually exclusive OR gates 568, 5 70, 572, and 574; two 8-bit absolute value calculators 576 And 578; two 4-bit one-bit full-load ^ adders 5 8 0 and 5 8 2 with fast transmission capability; one full-bit adder 584 with one bit binary, and one accumulator 586 with frequency discrimination capability . Please refer to FIG. 27. The circuit component 588 includes: a 6 nanosecond delay gate 590_; a 2 to 1 multiplier 592 with twice the driving capacity; and two 8-bit D-type flip-flops 594 and 596. The adjustment rate at the signal is the phase of the clock signal pattern that has been ranked by the general phase adjustment action. The phase of the spatial reference phase is used in the synchronous engineering step in this disclosure to calculate the continuous frequency. The reason for maintaining the same establishment is so that the previously required if $ is completed in the circuit of Figures 23-27, and each data frame / each signal generates a bit (N) adjustment rate with a phase difference of 90 degrees, At the same time, there is ample frequency offset, which is due to the Doppler / alignment to the subsequent processing procedures, these procedures and the demodulation. As a result, these signals can be transmitted without hesitation. So it is clear for the subsequent processing procedure = it is necessary. In short, the rapid peer-to-peer project needs s γ ^ to be designed in a time-domain data frame for a short period of time, compared with what is required in conventional radio communication systems and uses fewer microprocessor resources to complete

Shang

成0 請參考圖28及29,將要 特殊用途積體電路之交感裝 點。就這一點而言,前述的 閘門兩種訊號的發展情況, 考依據,這些電訊號決定每 並計數所接收之訊號的大小 碼進行對抗、比較。前述之 一個樣本在所標記的範圍是 之特徵點有助於在交互過程 發明之此特徵點,可以提供 行電訊號之方形波總數的計 了重新找到每一個樣本的標 樣本的標記位元與原先的標 反相電號的資訊會被使用 頻道所提供的訊息有所衝突 為每個訊號的功率管理因素 者0 描述本發明之電路組件表現在 置部分的待機及閘門功能的優 頻率調整訊號也是使用待機及 來作為同相及反相的電訊號參 一個交互過程的相對應分佈, ’以便與每一個參考用的金氏 交互過程的目的是為了決定那 否已經被傳送出去。因為前述 中之較強訊號的保留,所以本 一個比習知在兩個頻道中,進 算’有比較好的優點表現。為 記位元,接收裝置會進行現有 記位元進行比較。來自同相與 在這樣的比較過程中。當這些 時’則訊號較強的一個便會因 ’而成為決定樣本的標記位元 電路組件598包括:互斥或閑6〇〇、互斥非或閉6〇2, 及反相器604、606。同時,也包括了"及閘"6〇8、61〇及γ 616 ’·及一個,,或閘"614與,,非或閘"612。另外,也包括了 帶:低重置及正緣觸發的。型正反器618,三個帶有低 β又定同重置忐力之4位το二進位、可上數/下數的計數器 620、622 ' 624 ’及一個8位元、具有絕對值功能的計算器0, please refer to Figures 28 and 29, which will be the sympathetic decoration of special-purpose integrated circuits. In this regard, the development of the aforementioned two types of gate signals is based on the fact that each of these signals determines the size and number of the received signals for confrontation and comparison. The feature point of the aforementioned sample in the marked range is helpful for inventing this feature point in the interactive process. It can provide the total number of square waves of the telecommunication signal. The information of the original standard anti-phase signal will be conflicted by the information provided by the channel. The power management factor of each signal is described. The circuit component of the present invention is shown in the standby frequency and gate function of the frequency adjustment signal. It also uses standby and the corresponding distribution of the in-phase and anti-phase electrical signals to participate in an interactive process, so that the purpose of the Jin's interactive process with each reference is to determine whether it has been transmitted. Because of the strong signal retention mentioned above, this one has a better performance than the known one in the two channels. To do this, the receiving device compares the existing ones. From the same phase and during such comparisons. When these, 'the stronger signal will become the marker bit circuit component 598 that determines the sample due to: mutually exclusive or idle 600, mutually exclusive non-closed 602, and inverter 604, 606. At the same time, it also includes " and gates " 6〇8, 61〇, and γ 616 ' and one, or gate " 614 and, and non-or gate " 612. Also included are bands: low reset and positive edge triggered. Type flip-flop 618, three 4-bit το binary with low β and fixed resetting force, up / down counters 620, 622 '624' and an 8-bit, with absolute value function Calculator

475321 五、發明說明(120) 6 2 6 ’而且此計算器的輸出結果是可以表現訊號強度的同 相訊號絕對值。 電路組件628類似於電路組件598,但是處理過程是反 相訊號。電路組件628包括··互斥或閘630,反相器632及 634,及互斥非或閘636。同時,也包括了 ”及閘" 638、640 及646 ’及一個或閘11 644。另外,也包括了 一個帶有低重 置及正緣觸發的D型正反器648,三個帶有低設定、低重置 能力之4位元二進位、可上數/下數的計數器65〇、652、 6 54。最後,還有一個8位元、具有絕對值功能的計算器 6 5 6 ’此計算器決定了反相訊號強度的絕對值,同時提供 此絕對值為輸出結果。 以上所述僅為本發明之最具實用價值的最佳實施例之 一而已’凡容易思及與本發明有關之具體實施例應皆在此 限;其它未脫離本創作所揭示之精神下所完成的等效改變 或修飾’均應包含在下述之申請專利範圍内。475321 V. Description of the invention (120) 6 2 6 ’And the output of this calculator is the absolute value of the in-phase signal that can express the signal strength. Circuit component 628 is similar to circuit component 598, but the processing is an inverse signal. The circuit assembly 628 includes a mutex NOR gate 630, inverters 632 and 634, and a mutex NOR gate 636. At the same time, it also includes "He Gates" 638, 640, and 646 'and one OR gate 11 644. In addition, it also includes a D-type flip-flop 648 with low reset and positive edge trigger, three with 4-bit binary with low setting and low reset capability, up / down counters 65, 652, 6 54. Finally, there is also an 8-bit, absolute value calculator 6 5 6 ' This calculator determines the absolute value of the strength of the inverted signal, and provides the absolute value of the output result. The above is just one of the most practically preferred embodiments of the present invention. Relevant specific embodiments should all be within this limit; other equivalent changes or modifications that have been made without departing from the spirit disclosed in this creation should all be included in the scope of patent applications described below.

圖式簡單說明 塊圖 圖Ϊ為實施本發明之核心模組的功能方塊圖。 圖2A為本發明使用於電話基地台之核心模組的功能方 Θ 2 B為本叙明使用於手機之核心模組的功能方塊圖。 圖3為本發明之較佳手機實施例的前透視圖。 圖4為適用於基地台核心模組之另一實施例 旎方塊圖。 „5B為圖1中核心模組的可展佈頻譜數 路功能方塊圖。 ^〜迅 圖6為本發明之較佳收發器實施例的功能方塊圖。 圖7為圖1中核心模組的中本_ 機間接飧千立《 μ : ! 處早70與展佈頻譜數據 辦间接線不思及功能方塊圖。 圖8為本發明發射訊號較佳實施例之時序圖。 =本發明接收訊號較佳實施例之時序圖。 的方塊#意1。 月之車^土貫施例在訊號資料結構上 圖11為表示以本發明之較估每 之相互關係的功能方塊圖。…1在不同操作模式下 圖1 2為本發明在主控裝罟, 訊步驟之較佳實施例的流程受控裂置端間之初始通 、圖。 圖1 3為本發明在使用無線 例的圖解說明。 頻率頻譜分佈之較佳實施 圖14A及14B為表示以本笋 始、接通及完成一次通訊連結所带=佳貫施例來進行初 475321 圖式簡單說明 圖1 5為表示使用本發明之較佳實施例在進行初始、接 通及完成一次通訊連結之不同狀態間之相互關係的撥接處 理狀態轉換圖。 圖1 6為表示本發明之較佳實施例所完成的不同工作項 目與國際標準組織所定義之不同階層間的相對關係流程 圖。 圖1 7為圖1 2的詳細流程圖’並包括外加的協定。 圖18為從手機撥接到遠處的功能示意圖。 圖1 9為從基地台撥接到遠處的功能示意圖。 圖2 0為撥接終了的功能示意圖。 圖21為表示本發明在不同的系統設定及不同的操作模 式下之較佳實施例的概要圖示。 圖2 2 A - 2 2 D為表示以本發明之較佳實施例的手機裝置 在不同的通訊連結設定下的概要圖示。 圖23為顯示本發明如何產生及使用反餘弦(c〇sine)函 數替代正弦(sine)函數之特殊用途積體電路(ASIC)實施例 之元件的電路圖表。 圖24-27為顯示本發明如何在沒有正弦波形參考訊號 及其反訊號下,進行樣本取樣及排序技巧之特殊用途積體 電路實施例元件的電路圖。 圖28-29辱顯示本發明為了維持同相電訊號之電量函 數訊號及閘流函數訊號的電源、量測之特殊用途積體電路實 施例之元件的電路圖。Brief description of the diagram Block diagram Figure Ϊ is a functional block diagram of the core module implementing the present invention. FIG. 2A is a functional block diagram of a core module used in a telephone base station according to the present invention. Θ 2 B is a functional block diagram illustrating a core module used in a mobile phone. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of a preferred mobile phone embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of another embodiment of a base station core module. „5B is a functional block diagram of the spreadable spectrum number of the core module in FIG. 1. ^ ~ FIG. 6 is a functional block diagram of a preferred transceiver embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a block diagram of the core module in FIG. 1. Nakamoto _ machine indirectly 飧 立 μ:! At the early 70 and spread spectrum data office indirect line and functional block diagram. Figure 8 is a timing diagram of the preferred embodiment of the transmit signal of the present invention = = receive signal of the present invention Timing chart of the preferred embodiment. Block ## 1. Moon of the car ^ Tuguan embodiment on the signal data structure Figure 11 is a functional block diagram showing the relationship between each of the comparisons of the present invention ... 1 is different In the operation mode, FIG. 12 is an initial communication and a diagram of the flow control-controlled split ends of the preferred embodiment of the present invention in a main control device and a communication step. FIG. 13 is a diagrammatic illustration of a wireless example of the present invention. The preferred implementation of the frequency spectrum distribution. Figures 14A and 14B show the beginning, connection, and completion of a communication link = good implementation example to carry out the initial 475321. The diagram is briefly explained. Figure 15 shows the comparison using the present invention. The preferred embodiment performs the initial, connection, and completion of a communication link. The state transition diagram of the dial-up processing relationship between states. Figure 16 is a flowchart showing the relative relationship between the different work items completed by the preferred embodiment of the present invention and the different levels defined by the International Standards Organization. Figure 1 7 It is a detailed flowchart of Figure 12 'and includes additional agreements. Figure 18 is a functional diagram of dialing from a mobile phone to a remote location. Figure 19 is a functional diagram of dialing from a base station to a remote location. Figure 20 is dialing Schematic diagram of the terminated function. Figure 21 is a schematic diagram showing a preferred embodiment of the present invention under different system settings and different operating modes. Figures 2 2-2 2 D show a preferred implementation of the present invention A schematic diagram of an example mobile phone device under different communication link settings. Figure 23 is a special-purpose integrated circuit (ASIC) implementation showing how the present invention generates and uses an inverse cosine function instead of a sine function Circuit diagrams of the components of the example. Figure 24-27 shows the components of the special-purpose integrated circuit embodiment of the present invention, which shows how to perform sample sampling and sequencing techniques without the sinusoidal waveform reference signal and its inverse signal. A circuit diagram. FIG 28-29 show the present invention in order to maintain shame with power supply and signal function of the number of thyristor phase function signal of the electrical signal, a circuit diagram of the embodiment of the special purpose elements integrated circuit real measurement of administration.

475321 v 圖式簡單說明 [符號說明]475321 v Schematic description [Symbol description]

22CPU 24展佈頻譜數據機 26無線電波收發裝置 2 7核心模組 28基地台 30手機 3 8天線 40麥克風 42揚聲器 48螢幕 44按鍵 4 6天線 50DRAM 52上蓋 5 4、5 6指示燈 5 8外線介面 6 0外線 62揚聲器 64麥克風 6 6中央處理單元 ’ 68控制器22CPU 24 spread spectrum data machine 26 radio wave transmitting and receiving device 2 7 core module 28 base station 30 mobile phone 3 8 antenna 40 microphone 42 speaker 48 screen 44 key 4 6 antenna 50DRAM 52 cover 5 4, 5 6 indicator light 5 8 external interface 6 0 outside line 62 speakers 64 microphone 6 6 central processing unit '68 controller

70DSP 72控制器介面70DSP 72 controller interface

第126頁 475321 圖式簡單說明 74A接收器 76B接收器 78時脈產生器 80發射器 500電路 502、5142D正反器 5 0 4驅動裝置 506、524、526互斥或閘 5 0 8互斥非或閘 510、512多工器 516、518負邊緣觸發的2D正反器 520、522跟隨裝置 5 2 8電路組件 532、534、5 36、538低重置及正邊緣觸發的正反器 540、542、544、546低重置的4位元正反器 548帶有低重置之8位元偏移暫存器 5 5 0電路組件 551、5524X4位元的乘法器 5 53、5 548位元的絕對值計算器 5 5 5、5 5 6具有快速傳送能力的4位元二進位全加法器 5 5 7二進位.的全加法器 558、559互斥或閘Page 126 475321 Simple description of 74A receiver 76B receiver 78 clock generator 80 transmitter 500 circuit 502, 5142D flip-flop 5 0 4 drive device 506, 524, 526 mutually exclusive or gate 5 0 8 mutually exclusive OR gates 510, 512 multiplexers 516, 518 2D flip-flops 520, 522 with negative edge triggering 5 2 8 circuit components 532, 534, 5 36, 538 low reset and flip-flops with positive edge trigger 540, 542, 544, 546 low reset 4-bit flip-flop 548 with low reset 8-bit offset register 5 5 0 circuit components 551, 5524 x 4-bit multiplier 5 53, 5 548 bits Absolute value calculator 5 5 5, 5 5 6 4-bit binary full adder with fast transfer capability 5 5 7 binary. Full adder 558, 559 mutually exclusive or gate

第127頁Chapter 127

Claims (1)

一種m盖养通訊系統,包含: 1 2個以内之ΐ線基地台; 複數個無線手機裝置; 核心模組,係配罟μ $、+、& . ^ t 手機内,該核心模—個基地台及前述每-個 接順&彳尸 > 、]、、匕3 一具有記憶體的計算裝置、一直 、一 ^ M /¾頻瑨數據機、及一無線電波收發裝置; 前述基:台丘同Ϊ 2括識別協f,並適用於允許最多12個 機裝置無線通訊7 ί,,亚允許前述任—手機裝置與其它手 一應用程式, 持在前述基地台與 連線。 係由前述計算裝置所執行藉 前述手機裝置之間任意組合 以建立及維 的無線通訊 2 · 如申請專利範 含一通訊協定,該 任一對手機裝置相 與。 3. 如申請專利範 更包括複數個不同 用在多個終端裝置 圍線通訊_^蘇還包 通訊協定可准許前述複數個手機裝置之 互通訊’且不需藉由基地台電話的參 圍分散n線,其中 於其它互補金氏碼的家族,該金氏碼適 上,以便共享一操作頻率。 U : ’專利範圍第3項之分散式無線通訊4统,豆Φ 上述可執行的應用 —一^-二 ’、 私式亦包括可k供在無線電話及具備雙An M cover communication system includes: 12 or less base stations; a plurality of wireless mobile phone devices; a core module configured with 罟 μ $, +, &. ^ T In a mobile phone, the core module-a The base station and each of the aforementioned connections & 彳 corporate >,] ,, 匕 3-a computing device with a memory, a constant, a ^ M / ¾ frequency modem, and a radio wave transceiver; : Taiqiu Tong 2 includes identification protocol f, and is applicable to allow wireless communication with up to 12 devices, and allows the above-mentioned mobile phone devices and other applications to be held and connected at the aforementioned base station. The wireless communication performed by the aforementioned computing device by using any combination between the aforementioned mobile phone devices to establish and maintain the wireless communication 2 · If the patent application includes a communication protocol, the pair of mobile phone devices are associated with each other. 3. If the patent application includes a plurality of different peripheral communication devices that are used in multiple terminal devices _ ^ The Suhuanbao communication protocol may allow the aforementioned multiple mobile devices to communicate with each other, and it does not need to be dispersed by the base station phone. The n-line, among other families of complementary King's codes, is suitable for sharing an operating frequency. U: ‘Decentralized wireless communication system in item 3 of the patent scope, the above-mentioned executable applications — one ^ -two’, and the private type also includes wireless phones and dual 第128頁 475321 向無線電波之裝置中的使用能力。 5_如申請專利範圍第4項之分散式無線通訊系绣,甘 更^括一分時雙工資λ結構,同時此結 =二貢料框、一接收次資料框、及768位元的總長度組專 t如申請專利範圍第5項之分散式無線通訊糸綠,*, ”:欠資料框包括:4 8 特殊其字中 元尾多工字元、及-文字次資料框的16位 =二' 元的接收多工紀錄、及-接收次資 抖框的1 6位元尾端。 饮队人貝 7· 如申請專利範圍第6項之分埒爷钮細β 數據機包括一取樣與排序其中 绩的夂老"::: 該電路即使在沒有正弦曲 線的爹考w、沒有反相訊號時仍適 分的頻率偏置來排除必須及時修正頻率偏置的^ 8 ’ 士申:專利範圍第散式無線诵却李吒,立中 中,使電路適用在決定是“ = t ^在上述的數據機 前述之兩種相&,在晶片對晶片丄:3相3fL 7虎’或是決疋 各相位貢獻度。 fBB片為根據之樣本交互過程的 第129頁Page 128 475321 Ability to use radio wave devices. 5_If the decentralized wireless communication system of item 4 of the patent application scope is embroidered, it is more convenient to include a time-sharing double-wage lambda structure, and at the same time, this knot = two tribute material frames, one receiving data frame, and a total length of 768 bits For example, if the decentralized wireless communication of item 5 of the patent application scope is green, *, ”: The data owing box includes: 4 8 special characters in the end of the word, multi-character characters, and the 16-bit sub-data box = Two's receive multiplexing record, and-the 16-bit end of the received secondary jitter box. Drinking team members 7. If the patent application scope of the 6th item, the master button fine β modem includes a sample And the oldest of the rankings :: This circuit has a proper frequency offset even when there is no sinusoidal curve and no inverse signal to eliminate the need to correct the frequency offset ^ 8 'Shishen : Patent Scope: Dispersive wireless recitation Li Li, Li Zhongzhong, make the circuit applicable when the decision is "= t ^ in the aforementioned two phases of the data machine & in the wafer-to-wafer 丄: 3 phase 3fL 7 tiger 'Or determine the contribution of each phase. fBB film is based on the sample interaction process 第 129 页
TW89104116A 1999-03-26 2000-03-06 Method and apparatus for a decentralized and wireless communications system TW475321B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US27724399A 1999-03-26 1999-03-26

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW475321B true TW475321B (en) 2002-02-01

Family

ID=23060025

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW89104116A TW475321B (en) 1999-03-26 2000-03-06 Method and apparatus for a decentralized and wireless communications system

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TW475321B (en)

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8538802B2 (en) 2009-09-11 2013-09-17 Shih Pi Ta Technology Ltd. System and method for building a communication link
TWI420882B (en) * 2006-10-17 2013-12-21 Marvell World Trade Ltd Display control for cellular phone
TWI426710B (en) * 2005-03-21 2014-02-11 Integrated Device Tech Discrete clock generator and timing/frequency reference
CN103778766A (en) * 2012-10-19 2014-05-07 陈骆潸 Bluetooth control equipment
TWI448132B (en) * 2012-06-22 2014-08-01 Univ Nat Taiwan Science Tech Time division duplexing control and protective device and method thereof
US8831588B2 (en) 2009-06-23 2014-09-09 National Taiwan University Data transmission adjustment system and data transmission adjustment method

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI426710B (en) * 2005-03-21 2014-02-11 Integrated Device Tech Discrete clock generator and timing/frequency reference
TWI420882B (en) * 2006-10-17 2013-12-21 Marvell World Trade Ltd Display control for cellular phone
US8831588B2 (en) 2009-06-23 2014-09-09 National Taiwan University Data transmission adjustment system and data transmission adjustment method
US8538802B2 (en) 2009-09-11 2013-09-17 Shih Pi Ta Technology Ltd. System and method for building a communication link
TWI448132B (en) * 2012-06-22 2014-08-01 Univ Nat Taiwan Science Tech Time division duplexing control and protective device and method thereof
CN103778766A (en) * 2012-10-19 2014-05-07 陈骆潸 Bluetooth control equipment

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR100390508B1 (en) Direct communication method for bluetooth terminal
CA1175933A (en) Subscriber telephone station
TW200849946A (en) Portable video communication device with multi-illumination source
TW475321B (en) Method and apparatus for a decentralized and wireless communications system
JPH01114246A (en) Sound recording telephone device with remote controlled change-over switch
TW201318402A (en) Communication system and communicating connection method thereof
US8666443B2 (en) Method and apparatus for muting a sounder device
JP2014087029A (en) Relay device and communication system
JPS62125718A (en) Radio telephony equipment
JP2002171338A (en) Radio communication terminal
JP2004266554A (en) Push-butten telephone device
JP2005175722A (en) Ip phone system and cordless phone for ip phone used for the same
JPH04150427A (en) Privacy telephone device for radio communication equipment
JP2567217B2 (en) Telephone device
JP2923194B2 (en) Digital cordless telephone system
JP2567215B2 (en) Telephone device with message board function
JP2004080641A (en) Transmission/reception method of simple personal digital assistant and simple personal digital assistant
JP3082158U (en) Intercom with mobile terminal calling function
JPH04372251A (en) Cordless telephone set
WO2003021925A3 (en) Method for establishing a telecommunication connection between two people
JPH0832713A (en) Cordlss telephone set
JPH01157141A (en) Telephone transfer privacy telephone system
KR20040037337A (en) Method for locking by call number and handset having function for locking by call number
JPH01151343A (en) Cordless telephone system
JPH0479551A (en) Telephone set

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees